Uploaded by davidbrooksyork69

TRAINING NOTES ARRIEL 1 Turbine Engine

advertisement
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
This document is intended to assist a TURBOMECA-qualified instructor in teaching
basic information related to the operation and maintenance of the ARRIEL 1
turboshaft engines.
It is a training aid and should only be used to support the training course to which
it refers, and only by a person attending such training. It must not be used in any
other circumstances.
It will not be updated and should not be relied upon for the maintenance or repair of
ARRIEL 1 engines. Only the current approved TURBOMECA maintenance technical
publications should be used for such purposes.
The acquisition of this document does not constitute proof of official formal training. Only
completion of a course delivered by a TURBOMECA-qualified instructor can lead to the
issuance of a TURBOMECA-recognised training certificate stating, when applicable, a
successful result.
Turbomeca Training - December 2013
This document is the property of TURBOMECA and it may not be copied without the express written authority of TURBOMECA.
Turbomeca Training is a registered Trademark.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
0.1
FOREWORD
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FOREWORD
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
0 - Foreword
1 - Introduction
2 - Power plant
3 - Engine
4 - Oil system
5 - Air system
6 - Fuel system
8 - Measurement and indicating
systems
9 - Starting system
10 - Electrical system
11 - Engine installation
12 - Troubleshooting
13 - Checking of knowledge
7 - Control system
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
0.2
SUMMARY
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
SUMMARY
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
0 - FOREWORD
-
Foreword...........................................
Summary...........................................
Table of contents...............................
List of abbreviations..........................
Conversion table...............................
3 - ENGINE
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.7
0.11
-
1 - INTRODUCTION
- General information.......................... 1.2
- Training programme ......................... 1.4 - 1.5
2 - POWER PLANT
- Power plant.......................................
- Principle of adaptation to the
helicopter..........................................
- Main characteristics..........................
- Design and development .................
- Maintenance ....................................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
2.2
2.8
2.10
2.14
2.18 - 2.29
Edition: May 2014
Engine - Presentation.......................
Axial compressor..............................
Centrifugal compressor.....................
Combustion chamber........................
Gas generator turbine.......................
Power turbine....................................
Exhaust system.................................
Reduction gearbox............................
Transmission shaft and accessory
gearbox.............................................
- Engine - Operation ...........................
- Engine - 1st line maintenance ..........
3.2
3.6
3.8
3.10
3.12
3.14
3.16
3.18
3.20
3.32
3.34 - 3.39
0.3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4 - OIL SYSTEM
- Oil system - Presentation .................
- Oil tank - Oil cooler - Oil pressure
transmitter ........................................
- Oil pumps .........................................
- Oil filter .............................................
- Oil filter pre-blockage indicator ........
- Low oil pressure switch ....................
- Electrical magnetic plugs .................
- Mechanical magnetic plugs ..............
- Strainers ...........................................
- Centrifugal breather .........................
- Oil system - Operation .....................
- External oil pipes .............................
- Oil system - 1st line maintenance ....
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
5 - AIR SYSTEM
4.2
4.6
4.8
4.10
4.14
4.16
4.18
4.20
4.22
4.24
4.26
4.28
4.30 - 4.35
-
Air system - Presentation .................
Internal air system ............................
Air tappings.......................................
Compressor bleed valve...................
External air pipes..............................
Air system - 1st line maintenance ....
6 - FUEL SYSTEM
Edition: May 2014
- Fuel system - Presentation ..............
- Fuel Control Unit...............................
- Pressurising, stop purge and
overspeed valves .............................
- Start valves assembly.......................
- Start injectors....................................
- Main injection system........................
- Combustion chamber drain valve.....
- Fuel system - Operation ...................
- External fuel pipes ...........................
- Fuel system - 1st line maintenance .
5.2
5.4
5.6
5.8
5.16
5.18 - 5.19
6.2
6.8
6.18
6.20
6.22
6.24
6.26
6.28
6.32
6.34 - 6.37
0.4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(CONTINUED)
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
(CONTINUED)
7 - CONTROL SYSTEM
- Control system - Presentation........... 7.2
- Control system - Operation .............. 7.6
- Control system - 1st line
maintenance .................................... 7.30 - 7.31
8 - MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEMS
- Measurement and indicating
systems - Presentation.....................
- Speed measurement and indicating
system...............................................
- T4 measurement and indicating
system...............................................
- Torque measurement and indicating
system...............................................
- Miscellaneous indications.................
- Measurement and indicating
systems - 1st line maintenance ........
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
9 - STARTING SYSTEM
-
Starting system - Presentation..........
Starter-generator...............................
Ignition system..................................
Starting system - Operation .............
Starting system - 1st line
maintenance ....................................
10 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
- Electrical system - Presentation........
- Power turbine overspeed detection
system...............................................
- Electrical harnesses..........................
- Electrical system - 1st line
maintenance ....................................
8.2
8.4
8.10
8.14
8.18
9.2
9.6
9.8
9.10
9.14 - 9.15
10.2
10.4
10.16
10.18 - 10.19
8.22 - 8.23
Edition: May 2014
0.5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
11 - ENGINE INSTALLATION
-
Engine compartment.........................
Engine mounting and lifting...............
Air intake and exhaust systems........
Engine/airframe system interfaces....
Drains - Purges - Air vents................
Power drive.......................................
Fire protection...................................
Engine installation - 1st line
maintenance ....................................
OBSERVATIONS .......................... LAST PAGE
11.2
11.4
11.6
11.8
11.16
11.18
11.20
These Training Notes are designed to meet the requirements
of training and, to a certain extent, take into consideration ATA
104 recommendations and the requirements of the various
authorities concerned.
This document includes 329 pages.
11.22 - 11.25
12 - TROUBLESHOOTING
- General............................................. 12.2
- Troubleshooting................................ 12.4
- Conclusion ....................................... 12.10 - 12.11
13 - CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
-
Introduction.......................................
Questionnaire 1 ................................
Questionnaire 2 ................................
Questionnaire 3 ................................
Questionnaire 4.................................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
13.2
13.3
13.6
13.12
13.15 - 13.28
Edition: May 2014
0.6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(CONTINUED)
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
The abbreviations / symbols shown below may be used during training:
A/C.................
AC..................
ACMS.............
ACW...............
AEO................
AFCS..............
AMC................
AMCU.............
AMM...............
APM................
APU................
ARMS.............
ATA.................
BITE...............
C1...................
C2...................
CAD................
CAN................
CDS................
CFT.................
CPDS.............
cSt..................
CVD................
CW..................
CWP...............
daN.................
Aircraft
Alternating Current
Automatic Control Monitoring System
Anticlockwise
All Engines Operating
Automatic Flight Control System
Aircraft Management Computer
Auxiliary Mode Control Unit
Aircraft Maintenance Manual
Auto-Pilot Module
Auxiliary Power Unit
Automatic Recording Monitoring System
Air Transport Association
Built-In Test Equipment
Gas generator operating cycles
Power turbine operating cycles
Caution Advisory Display
Controller Area Network
Cockpit Display System
Frequency-to-Voltage Converter
Central Panel Display System
Centistokes
Bleed valve control
Clockwise
Central Warning Panel
Decanewtons
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
DAU................ Data Acquisition Unit
DC.................. Direct Current
DCU................ Digital Control Unit
DDR................ DECU Digital Read-out
DECU............. Digital Engine Control Unit
EBCAU........... Engine Back-up Control Auxiliary Unit
ECL................. Engine Control Lever
ECP................ Engine Control Panel
ECU................ Electronic Control Unit
EDR................ Engine Data Recorder
EDU................ Electronic Display Unit
EECU............. Engine Electronic Control Unit
EGT................ Exhaust Gas Temperature
EICAS............. Engine Instrumentation and Crew Advisory
System
EID................. Electronic Instrument Display
EPC................ Engine Power Check
F..................... Frequency
FADEC........... Full Authority Digital Engine Control
FAU................ Fault Annunciator Unit
FCU................ Fuel Control Unit
FLI.................. First Limit Indicator
FM.................. Flight Manual
FND................ Flight and Navigation Display
FOD................ Foreign Object Damage
ft..................... Feet
Edition: May 2014
0.7
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
FVC................
FWD...............
g.....................
G.....................
GOV...............
HE..................
HF...................
HFC................
HIP/SARM......
HP...................
HP...................
HUMS.............
Hz...................
IAS..................
ICAO...............
ICP..................
ICR.................
IETP................
IFDS...............
IGV.................
IIDS................
ILS..................
IPC.................
IPS..................
ISA..................
Frequency-to-Voltage Converter
Forward
Grams
Mass airflow
Governor
High Energy
Human Factor
Hourly Fuel Consumption
Hovering at Increased Power/Search And
Rescue Mission
Horsepower
High Pressure
Health and Usage Monitoring System
Hertz
Indicated AirSpeed
International Civil Aviation Organisation
Intermediate Contingency Power
Intermediate Contingency Rating
Interactive Electronic Technical Publication
Integrated Flight Display System
Inlet Guide Vanes
Integrated Instrument Display System
Integrated Logistics Support
Illustrated Parts Catalogue
Inlet Particle Separator
International Standard Atmosphere
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
KE...................
kg/s.................
kHz.................
kPa.................
kW..................
l/h....................
lb.....................
LH...................
LP...................
LPG................
LRU................
LUH................
LVDT...............
mA..................
Max.................
MCL................
MCP................
MCP................
MCQ...............
MCR...............
MFD................
MGB...............
MHz................
Min..................
MPAI...............
MTCP.............
Edition: May 2014
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(CONTINUED)
Kinetic Energy
Kilograms per second
Kilohertz
Kilopascals
Kilowatts
Litres per hour
Pounds
Left-Hand
Low Pressure
Collective pitch/control system link
Line Replaceable Unit
Light Utility Helicopter
Linear Variable-Differential Transducer
Milliamperes
Maximum
Manual Control Lever
Maximum Continuous Power
Maximum Contingency Power
Multiple-Choice Questionnaire
Maximum Contingency Rating
Multi-Function Display
Main gearbox
Megahertz
Minimum
Multi-Purpose Air Intake
Maintenance Test Control Panel
0.8
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
(CONTINUED)
MTOP.............
mV..................
N.....................
N1 / NG..........
N2 / NTL /
NFT / NPT......
NGV................
NMD...............
NPS................
NPS................
NR..................
O/S.................
OAT................
OEI.................
OEICT.............
OEIH...............
OEIL...............
OVSP..............
P.....................
PFD................
PLA.................
PPNG.............
PSI..................
PSIA...............
PSID...............
PSIG...............
Maximum Take-Off Power
Millivolts
Rotation speed
Gas generator rotation speed
Power turbine rotation speed
Nozzle Guide Vane
Navigation and Mission Display
Power output shaft rotation speed
Neutral Position Switch
Rotor rotation speed
Overspeed
Outside Air Temperature
One Engine Inoperative
One Engine Inoperative - Continuous
One Engine Inoperative - High
One Engine Inoperative - Low
Overspeed
Pressure
Primary Flight Display
Power Lever Assembly
NG piston position
Pounds per Square Inch
Pounds per Square Inch Absolute
Pounds per Square Inch Differential
Pounds per Square Inch Gauge
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
PSU................
PT...................
RDAU.............
RH..................
rpm.................
RVDT..............
SB...................
SCR................
SFC................
shp..................
SI....................
SL...................
SMM...............
SMS................
SRU................
t......................
T.....................
T/O..................
TBO................
TET.................
TGT................
TOT................
TRQ................
TU...................
US G...............
V.....................
Edition: May 2014
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Power Supply Unit
Power Turbine
Remote Data Acquisition Unit
Right-Hand
Revolutions per minute
Rotary Variable-Differential Transducer
Service Bulletin
Super Contingency Rating
Specific Fuel Consumption
Shaft horsepower
International system of units
Service Letter
Safety Management Manual
Safety Management System
Shop Replaceable Unit
Time
Temperature
Take-Off
Time Between Overhauls
Turbine Entry Temperature
Turbine Gas Temperature
Turbine Outlet Temperature
Torque
Technical Update
US Gallons
Volts
0.9
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
VA...................
VAC................
VDC................
VEMD.............
VHIU...............
Vin..................
VMD................
VMS................
Vout................
VSV................
W....................
WF..................
XBV................
XCP................
XF...................
XMV................
XPA.................
XTL.................
XV...................
Z.....................
Zd...................
Zp...................
Volt-Amperes
Volts, Alternating Current
Volts, Direct Current
Vehicle and Engine Multi-function Display
Vehicle Helicopter Intermediate Unit
Input voltage
Vehicle Management Display
Vehicle Monitoring System
Output voltage
Variable Stator Vanes
Power
Fuel flow
Bleed valve position signal
Collective pitch position signal
Fuel metering valve position signal
Metering valve position signal
Pedal position signal
Pedal position signal / N2 trim position signal
Variable vane position signal
Altitude
Density altitude
Pressure altitude
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
°C...................
°F....................
K.....................
±......................
Ω.....................
∆.....................
∆P...................
ω.....................
*......................
Edition: May 2014
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(CONTINUED)
Degrees Celsius
Degrees Fahrenheit
Kelvins
Plus or minus (tolerance permitted)
Ohms
Difference (delta)
Pressure difference
Angular velocity
Datum (e.g. N1* = N1 datum)
0.10
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
UNIT
International System
British or American Systems
Length
1 mm
1m
Volume
1 dm3 = 1 litre
Mass
1 kg
= 2.2 lb
Power
1 kW
= 1.34 HP
Temperature
°C
K
Pressure
1 kPa = 0.01 bar
= 0.145 PSI
Flow (air, oil, fuel)
1 kg/s
= 2.2 lb/s
Specific Fuel Consumption
1 g/kW.h
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
= 0.039 inches
= 3 ft 3 inches = 39 inches
= 0.26 US gallons
= (°F-32).5/9
= [(°F-32).5/9] + 273
= 0.00164 lb/HP.h
0.11
CONVERSION TABLE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CONVERSION TABLE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
1 - INTRODUCTION
- General information .............................................................................. 1.2
- Training programme ............................................................................. 1.4 - 1.5
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
1.1
INTRODUCTION
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
GENERAL INFORMATION
TURBOMECA Training
Adequate training is essential for obvious safety reasons, but also
to reduce additional maintenance costs incurred by unjustified
removals and excessive downtime.
In accordance with TURBOMECA support's proximity policy,
TURBOMECA Training has developed a worldwide training
network: it has an official office or Training Center for each
continent.
"Greater knowledge leads to greater efficiency".
TURBOMECA Training courses can therefore be conducted
worldwide:
Objectives of training
- In the TURBOMECA France reference Training Center
The main objective is the acquisition of the knowledge required
for the tasks to be achieved (know and know how).
Further information is also communicated to widen the skill
and the experience of the trainee.
- In other TURBOMECA subsidiaries, e.g. TURBOMECA
AUSTRALASIA or TURBOMECA ASIA PACIFIC (Singapore)
- In TURBOMECA approved Training Centers
- Performance based training according to task analysis,
with classroom sessions, student involvement, practical work
and trouble shooting techniques
- Advanced training aids: training notes, multimedia
courseware (or Computer Aided Presentation) and
demonstration training engine
- Instructors trained on the product and in training methods,
and qualified by TURBOMECA
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
- In the TURBOMECA do Brasil reference Training Center
- In delegated Training Centers
Training approach
- Courses are taught in English and French.
- In the TURBOMECA USA reference Training Center
- Directly on the customer's site.
The training courses are conducted by an instructor detached
from TURBOMECA or by a TURBOMECA qualified and
accredited instructor.
TURBOMECA training contact
The focal point for all your TURBOMECA Training needs is the
"TURBOMECA Operator On-Line Support" (TOOLS) web site:
www.turbomeca-support.com
Edition: May 2014
1.2
INTRODUCTION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
"The power of knowledge"
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
TRAINING OBJECTIVES
Adequate training is essential for obvious safety reasons,
but also to reduce additional maintenance costs incurred
by unjustified removals and excessive downtime.
TRAINING APPROACH
"Greater knowledge leads to greater efficiency".
North America Area
TM USA
RTC
Europe Africa Middle East
Area
The focal point for all your
TURBOMECA Training needs:
www.turbomeca-support.com
TM F
RTC
Corporate
TURBOMECA
Training
TAP
RTC
TM B
RTC
South America Area
GENERAL INFORMATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
Asia Pacific Australasia
Area
RTC ................. Reference Training Centre
TM ................... TURBOMECA
TM F ................ TURBOMECA France
TM USA........... TURBOMECA USA
TM B................ TURBOMECA do Brasil
TAP ................. TURBOMECA Asia Pacific
1.3
INTRODUCTION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TRAINING: "The power of knowledge"
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
The training programme is established to meet the
training requirements and takes into consideration ATA 104
recommendations and the requirements of the various authorities
concerned.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TRAINING PROGRAMME
It should be noted that the "classroom sessions" alternate with
periods devoted to demonstrations, practical exercises and visits.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
1.4
INTRODUCTION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
TRAINING COURSE
1st LINE MAINTENANCE
COURSE
DURATION
2 DAYS
At the end of this course, the trainee will be able to identify the engine components, describe and
explain the operation of the engine and its systems, and carry out maintenance procedures (engine
installed in the airframe) and troubleshooting.
5 DAYS
At the end of this course, the trainee will be able to identify the engine components, carry out
certain maintenance procedures (engine removed from the airframe), i.e. the removal/installation of
2nd LINE MAINTENANCE modules and Shop Replaceable Units.
PROGRAMME: The programme mainly includes practical work. It can be carried out j u s t after the
COURSE
1st line maintenance course.
3 DAYS
At the end of this course, the trainee will be able to carry out the intramodular maintenance procedures
(deep maintenance).
3rd LINE MAINTENANCE
COURSE
FROM 3 DAYS
TO 3 WEEKS
PROGRAMME: This course consists entirely of practical work and the trainees must have certain
qualifications. The course documentation consists of the Maintenance Manual and
Maintenance Technical Instructions. The qualification awarded at the end of this
course is time-limited and will be renewed under certain conditions.
At the end of this course, the trainee will have a greater understanding of the engine and its systems.
REFRESHER
NOTE: This course is recommended for technicians who have already attended the 1st line maintenance
course and who have since acquired about one year's experience on the type of engine concerned.
2 DAYS
At the end of this course, the trainee will be able to better identify and correct operating problems.
TROUBLESHOOTING
FUEL AND CONTROL
SYSTEMS
ENGINE
DOCUMENTATION
NOTE: This course is recommended for technicians who have already attended the 1st line maintenance
course and who have since acquired about one year's experience on the type of engine concerned.
At the end of this course, the trainee will have an in-depth understanding of the engine fuel and control
systems.
NOTE: This course is recommended for technicians who have already attended the 1st line maintenance
course and who have since acquired about one year's experience on the type of engine concerned.
At the end of this course, the trainee will be able to understand and use the engine documentation.
NOTE: A basic knowledge of engines is recommended.
2 DAYS
2 DAYS
2 DAYS
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS / ATA 104 RECOMMENDATIONS / REQUIREMENTS OF THE VARIOUS AUTHORITIES CONCERNED
TRAINING PROGRAMME
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
1.5
INTRODUCTION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FAMILIARISATION
OBJECTIVE
At the end of this course, the trainee will be able to describe the engine, explain its principle of
operation and identify the main components of the engine and its systems.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
2 - POWER PLANT
- Power plant ............................................................................................ 2.2
- Principle of adaptation to the helicopter ............................................ 2.8
- Main characteristics ............................................................................. 2.10
- Design and development ..................................................................... 2.14
- Maintenance .......................................................................................... 2.18 - 2.29
ALWAYS REFER
TO THE
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.1
POWER PLANT
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
POWER PLANT
Function
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
The power plant provides power by transforming the energy
contained in the air and fuel into shaft power.
Main characteristics
- Type: free-turbine turboshaft engine with forward power drive
via an external shaft
- Design: modular
- Max. Take-Off Power (MTOP) (engine installed): from 480 to
560 kW (650 to 760 shp): according to version
- Specific Fuel Consumption: according to version
- Output shaft speed: 6000 rpm (at 100% N2) (except 1S1)
- Approximate dimensions and mass of engine (may vary
according to version):
• Length: 1166 mm (45.5 inches)
• Width: 465.5 mm (18.2 inches)
• Height: 609 mm (23.8 inches)
• Dry mass: 126 kg (277 lb).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.2
POWER PLANT
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
GAS
AIR
POWER
FUEL
6000 rpm at 100% N2
(except 1S1)
POWER PLANT
Type:
Free turbine turboshaft
engine with forward power drive
via an external shaft
Max. Take-Off Power (MTOP)
(engine installed):
From 480 to 560 kW (650 to 760 shp)
according to version
Design:
Modular
Specific fuel consumption:
According to version
Dry mass:
126 kg (277 lb)
GENERAL
POWER PLANT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.3
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
POWER PLANT
This section presents the main functional components of the
engine.
Gas generator
Transmission shaft
- External shaft housed in a protection tube which connects
the reduction gearbox to the accessory gearbox.
Accessory gearbox
- Single-stage axial compressor
- Gearbox containing the accessory drive train (driven by the
gas generator) and the main power drive.
- Single-stage centrifugal compressor
- Annular combustion chamber with centrifugal fuel injection
- Two-stage axial turbine.
Power turbine
- Single-stage axial turbine.
Exhaust pipe
- Elliptical, axial exhaust pipe.
Reduction gearbox
- Reduction gearbox comprising three stages of helical gears.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.4
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
DESCRIPTION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Axial
compressor
Centrifugal
compressor
POWER TURBINE
Combustion
chamber
EXHAUST PIPE
Turbine
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GAS GENERATOR
ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
Accessory
drive train
Main power drive
TRANSMISSION SHAFT
REDUCTION GEARBOX
DESCRIPTION
POWER PLANT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.5
POWER PLANT
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OPERATION
Power turbine
This section presents the parameters and the adaptation of the
gas generator and power turbine.
Component adaptation
The operation of the power turbine is defined by the balance
between the power received from the gas generator in the form
of kinetic energy and the torque applied on the shaft, i.e. the
N2 rotation speed and the torque (TRQ).
In terms of its operation, the engine can be divided into two
functional assemblies:
Operation
- The gas generator, which provides kinetic energy
- The power turbine, which transforms this kinetic energy into
mechanical power on a shaft.
The two assemblies have different rotation speeds.
Operation is represented by the graph which shows the power
(W), the rotation speeds (N1 and N2) and the max. torque limit
(TRQ) imposed by the mechanical transmission:
- The torque (TRQ) is a function of the N2 rotation speed
- The power (W) is equal to the torque (TRQ) multiplied by the
angular velocity (ω)
Gas generator
The operation of the gas generator is defined by:
- At constant N2 speed, the power is only a function of the
torque
- The air mass flow (G) (airflow which enters the engine)
- The air pressure and air temperature at the centrifugal
compressor outlet (P2 and T2)
- The engine parameters can be represented as a function of
a reference parameter, e.g. N1.
- The fuel flow (WF) (rate at which fuel is injected into the
combustion chamber)
- The gas temperature at the gas generator turbine inlet (TET)
- The gas generator rotation speed (N1)
- The Kinetic Energy (KE) supplied to the power turbine.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.6
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
POWER PLANT
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
N1
(rotation speed)
G
(air mass
flow)
P2, T2
(compressor outlet
pressure and temperature)
POWER TURBINE
TRQ
(shaft torque)
KE
(Kinetic
Energy)
N2
(constant rotation speed)
W
(shaft power)
TET
(Turbine Entry Temperature)
WF
(fuel flow)
W
ENGINE
PARAMETERS
TRQ
Q)
.
ax
to
rq
ue
R
(T
M
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GAS GENERATOR
N1
isospeeds
G
W = TRQ . ω
ω = 2. .N
60
P0
W C
HF T
TE
/
P2
SFC
N2
Power (W) and speeds N1, N2
N2
Torque (TRQ) as a function of N2
N1
P2/P0: Compression ratio
HFC: Hourly Fuel Consumption
SFC : Specific Fuel Consumption
OPERATION
POWER PLANT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.7
POWER PLANT
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Installation requirements
Power transmission
The main functional requirements of the installation are:
The mechanical power supplied by the engine is used to drive
the helicopter rotors through a mechanical transmission.
- Constant rotor rotation speed (NR) in all operating conditions
This power is absorbed by:
- Max. torque (TRQ) limit (usually imposed by the aircraft
transmission)
- The main rotor (approx. 82%)
- The tail rotor (approx. 10%)
- Complete engine protection (N1 and N2 speeds, TET,
compressor surge (∆WF/∆t), …)
- The main gearbox (approx. 8%).
- Good load sharing in twin-engine configuration.
Twin-engine configuration
Adaptation to requirements
In twin-engine configuration, the engines are installed to the
rear of the main gearbox.
To obtain a constant power turbine rotation speed (N2), the
power supplied by the engine is automatically adapted to the
demand.
The power turbines of the two engines are mechanically
connected to the main gearbox, which drives the rotors (main
rotor and tail rotor).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
This adaptation is regulated by the control system, which meters
the fuel flow injected into the combustion chamber so as to deliver
the required power (variation of the gas generator rotation speed
(N1)), while keeping the engine within its operational limits.
Edition: May 2014
2.8
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PRINCIPLE OF ADAPTATION TO THE
HELICOPTER
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
MAIN
ROTOR
ENGINE 2
ENGINE
100%
TAIL
ROTOR
ENGINE 1
MAIN GEARBOX
8%
TAIL ROTOR
10%
MAIN GEARBOX
POWER TRANSMISSION
TWIN-ENGINE CONFIGURATION
N2
W - Power
NR
∆W
N1, N2, TET, ∆WF/∆t
ENGINE
∆N2
∆N2
Max. torque (TRQ) limit
∆t
ADAPTATION TO REQUIREMENTS
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
PRINCIPLE OF ADAPTATION TO THE HELICOPTER
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
time
Edition: May 2014
2.9
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MAIN ROTOR
82%
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
The engine ratings correspond to given conditions of helicopter
operation. The ratings are generally defined under determined
conditions of speed and atmosphere (altitude and temperature).
Note 1: In single-engine configuration, only the MTOP and
Max. Continuous Power ratings are authorised.
The engine can operate in the following ratings:
Note 2: Use of the OEI ratings: Use of these ratings requires
certain maintenance procedures to be carried out.
- AEO (All Engines Operating) ratings:
• Max. Take-Off Power (MTOP): max. rating which can be
used during take-off. This rating has a limited duration
(5 min. continuous)
• Max. Continuous Power: rating which can be used
without time limitation (this does not imply that it is used
permanently)
Note 3: The power values indicated correspond to the following
configuration: engine installed, max. torque in the
corresponding rating, ISA conditions at sea level.
- OEI (One Engine Inoperative) ratings:
• Max. Contingency Power (MCP): rating which can be
used in the event of one engine failure during take-off or
landing. This rating is limited to a period of continuous
operation of 2 min. 30 sec.
• Intermediate Contingency Power (ICP): rating which
can be used in the event of one engine failure in flight.
This rating is limited to 30 min. or unlimited (according
to versions).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.10
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ENGINE RATINGS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Always refer to
the Maintenance Manual for
the OEI ratings’ permitted
cumulative times
N1
MCP
MAX.
2 min. 30 sec.
MTOP (5 min.)
ICP
Max.
Continuous
30 min.
or unlimited
Power
AEO
RATINGS
OEI
RATINGS
Note: The power values indicated correspond to the following configuration: engine installed,
max. torque in the corresponding rating, ISA conditions at sea level.
ENGINE RATINGS
MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.11
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
The engine is designed to operate within a given climatic
envelope.
Note 1: The flight, starting and relight envelopes may also be
affected by the types of oil and fuel used and/or by
special procedures.
This envelope differs according to the engine operating phase:
Flight envelope
Note 2: The engine also operates within various other limits:
rotation speeds, temperatures, pressures, etc.
The flight envelope is the range within which the engine is certified
to be operated in "normal engine running" configuration. It is
defined in terms of atmospheric temperature (T0) and pressure
altitude (Zp).
Note 3: Refer to the Flight Manual for the official values of the
flight, starting and relight envelopes.
Starting and relight envelope
The starting and relight envelope is the range within which the
engine is certified to be started and relit (restarted).
Like the flight envelope, it is defined in terms of atmospheric
temperature (T0) and pressure altitude (Zp).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.12
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ENGINE OPERATING ENVELOPE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
REFER TO THE
FLIGHT MANUAL FOR
FURTHER DETAILS
6100 m
(20000 ft)
Flight envelope
4500 m
(14750 ft)
Starting and relight envelope
ATMOSPHERIC
TEMPERATURE
T0
0
-500 m
(-1650 ft)
-55°C
(-67°F)
+50°C
(+122°F)
FLIGHT, STARTING
AND RELIGHT ENVELOPES
Note: The flight, starting and relight
envelopes may also be affected by
the types of oil and fuel used and/or
by special procedures.
ENGINE OPERATING ENVELOPE
MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.13
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PRESSURE
ALTITUDE Zp
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
Development steps
Design principles
- Certification in 1977 by the French Authorities
The engine is designed to meet the aircraft propulsion
requirements and particularly for the new generation of
helicopters.
- The first production engine was delivered in January 1978
The engine design is based on:
- An optimised thermodynamic cycle which gives high
performance
- Simple and reliable components giving a good supportability,
and a good maintainability to reduce the costs.
- ARRIEL engines will be in service for many years to come.
Engine designation
- Example: ARRIEL 1A2.
ARRIEL - According to TURBOMECA tradition, engines are
named after lakes in the Pyrenees mountains.
- 1: Type
Engine development
The ARRIEL engine is based on research and experience of
other engines:
- A: Variant
- 2: Version.
- First generation engines: ASTAZOU, ARTOUSTE and
TURMO.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.14
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Optimised
thermodynamic cycle
ARRIEL 1
640 - 700 shp
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ENGINE DESIGN
Simple, reliable
components
ASTAZOU
500 - 1000 shp
Simple, reliable
components
High
performance
ARTOUSTE
400 - 850 shp
Cost
reduction
TURMO
1500 - 1600 shp
ENGINE DEVELOPMENT
DESIGN PRINCIPLES
Lake ARRIEL
2011
10000th
Arriel (1 and 2)
1978
First
production
1977
Certification
Example:
ARRIEL:
ARRIEL 1A2
Name of a lake in the
Pyrenees mountains
1: Type
A: Variant
2: Version
ENGINE DESIGNATION
time
STAGES OF DEVELOPMENT
GENERAL
DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.15
POWER PLANT
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
APPLICATIONS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
The ARRIEL 1 engines currently power the following helicopters:
- Squirrel and Dolphin (EUROCOPTER),
- A 109 K2 (Agusta),
- S 76 (Sikorsky),
- BK 117 (EUROCOPTER).
Maintenance concept
The main aspects of the maintenance concept are:
- Effective modularity
- Good accessibility
- Reduced removal and installation times
- "On-condition" monitoring
- Long TBO, right from initial introduction into service
- Low cost of ownership:
• Low production costs
• Durability (defined and proven TBO and life limits)
• High reliability
• Low fuel consumption.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.16
POWER PLANT
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
SQUIRREL
(EUROCOPTER)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
REGA
A 109 K2
(AGUSTA)
DOLPHIN
(EUROCOPTER)
I-RAIE
BK 117
(EUROCOPTER)
MAINTENANCE CONCEPT
- Effective modularity
- Good accessibility
- Reduced removal and installation times
- "On-condition" monitoring
- Long TBO, right from initial introduction
into service
- Low cost of ownership:
• Low production costs
• Durability (defined and proven TBO
and life limits)
• High reliability
• Low fuel consumption.
S 76
(SIKORSKY)
APPLICATIONS
DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.17
POWER PLANT
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAINTENANCE LEVELS
Other aspects of maintenance
Maintenance tasks are divided into 4 levels or "lines":
Refer to the pages that follow.
1st line maintenance: on-line engine maintenance.
Note 1: LRU - Line Replaceable Unit
SRU - Shop Replaceable Unit.
- Scheduled and preventive maintenance
• Checks and inspections
• Removals due to completed TBO or life limits
- Corrective maintenance
• Failure detection
• Replacement of LRUs
• Checks.
2nd line maintenance: workshop engine maintenance.
- Corrective maintenance: removal and installation of modules
and SRUs.
Note 2: The maintenance levels are determined by the operator
taking into account material difficulties, the personnel
and logistical considerations.
As far as the engine manufacturer is concerned, the
so-called routine maintenance procedures (1st and 2nd
line) are defined and described in the Maintenance
Manual. Deep maintenance (3rd line) and overhaul
(4th line) are described in other documents and are
subject to specific licence agreements.
3rd line maintenance: deep maintenance which involves
module repairs.
- Corrective maintenance: replacement of parts.
4th line maintenance: overhaul and repair in a specialist
workshop.
- Scheduled maintenance performed at the end of the TBO or
to replace parts which have reached their life limit.
- Corrective maintenance.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.18
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MAINTENANCE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAINTENANCE LEVELS
1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
- Scheduled or preventive
maintenance
- Corrective maintenance
(LRUs)
2ND LINE MAINTENANCE
- Corrective maintenance
(modules, SRUs)
Maintenance Manual
(Operator or Service Centre
or Maintenance Centre)
3RD LINE MAINTENANCE
- Deep maintenance
- Corrective maintenance
(parts)
4TH LINE MAINTENANCE
- Scheduled maintenance
(overhaul, repair in a specialist
workshop)
- Corrective maintenance
Maintenance Technical
Instructions
(Operator or Maintenance Centre)
Overhaul Manual
(Repair Centre)
MAINTENANCE LEVELS
MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.19
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAINTENANCE
LIFE LIMITATIONS
TBOs (Times Between Overhauls) are defined for the engine,
the modules and certain accessories. These TBOs, which are
determined on the basis of tests and experience, are subject
to an extension programme.
Counting of hours and cycles
The counting of hours relates to flight hours and is performed
either manually or automatically.
TBOs are expressed in flight hours.
Life limits
Certain components (mainly rotating parts such as compressors,
turbines, etc.) have a life limit which requires them to be scrapped
when the limit is reached.
Life limits are expressed in operating cycles (C1 or C2 cycles).
Calendar limits
A calendar limit is the time (expressed in years) after which an
engine, module or accessory subject to a calendar limit has to
be returned to the factory or an approved repair centre.
The calendar limit begins when the engine, module or accessory
concerned first enters into service after installation on the
airframe (following manufacture, overhaul or repair).
If an engine, module or accessory is put into storage, the
calendar limit continues to run.
A cycle is a clearly defined operating sequence. Cycles are
counted either manually or automatically. The method for
counting cycles and the various limits are described in chapter 05
of the Maintenance Manual.
A counting-check procedure (comparison between automatic
counting and manual counting) is carried out as part of periodic
maintenance.
A quick intermediate check can be carried out by comparing the
two engines' counters for a given period of operation.
On-condition monitoring
Some components have no TBO, life limit or calendar limit.
They are generally considered to be "on-condition" components.
Use-limited parts
These parts have a maximum usage time defined in hours and/or
cycles and include parts such as bearings, casings and shafts.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.20
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TBOs
Their limits are greater than the normal engine TBO, thus
permitting them to be used over two or more TBOs, which
reduces overhaul costs for the customer. These parts and their
corresponding limits are listed in the engine log book and in
chapter 05 of the Maintenance Manual.
ARRIEL 1
- Engine
- Modules
- Accessories
COUNTING OF HOURS
AND CYCLES
- Manual counting
- Automatic counting
- Counting-check
procedure
ON-CONDITION MONITORING
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TBOs
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Some components have no
TBO, life limit or calendar
limit. They are generally
considered to be "on-condition"
components
LIFE LIMITS
USE-LIMITED PARTS
Cycles for:
- Compressors
- Turbines
- Etc.
Maximum usage time:
- Defined in hours and/or cycles
- Greater than the normal engine
TBO
Can be used over two or more
TBOs, which reduces overhaul
costs
CALENDAR LIMITS
Time limits (since manufacture,
overhaul or repair):
- Engine
- Modules
- Accessories
N1 and N2 cycle
displays according
to variant
Cycle counter
according to variant
LIFE LIMITATIONS
MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.21
POWER PLANT
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAINTENANCE
Preventive maintenance is a programme of scheduled
inspections aimed at preventing failures from occurring. They
are defined in chapter 05 of the Maintenance Manual.
It includes two inspection types.
- Borescopic inspection: this permits inspection of internal
parts which are otherwise not accessible without disassembly
- Lubrication oil check: various methods are used to check
for the contamination of the oil (magnetic plugs, strainers,
sampling). Samples of oil are taken at regular intervals and
the samples are analysed to measure the contamination,
determine which component is failing and anticipate potential
failures (analysis by magnetic-particle inspection, ferrography,
spectrometric oil analysis)
Servicing inspections (except 1E2)
-
Examples of inspections/checks carried out
Inspection "after the last flight of the day"
Inspection "before the first flight of the day"
"Pre-flight" inspections
"Post-flight" inspections.
Servicing inspections (1E2)
- Vibration level check: the vibration level of the rotating
assemblies gives an indication of the engine's condition
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Inspection between two flights
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days.
- Power check: this is carried out by the pilot (refer to the
Flight Manual)
Periodic inspections
- These procedures can be "blocked" (at fixed intervals for all
the procedures) or staggered (each procedure is distributed
over a period of time to reduce the turnaround time while still
respecting the intervals)
- Visits are scheduled as a function of flight hours (e.g.: every
500 hours) or calendar (e.g.: 2 years)
- Special inspections (particular inspections et inspections
according to airworthiness).
- Visual inspections: direct visual inspections can also be
carried out for "on-condition" monitoring.
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
The aim of corrective maintenance is to put the engine back into
normal service as soon as possible. Corrective maintenance
includes all procedures which must be carried out when required
(in the event of a failure, anomaly, etc.) and which are defined
in chapter 71 of the Maintenance Manual.
If an engine, module or accessory is put into storage, this
calendar period is suspended.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.22
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Servicing inspections / Scheduled inspections
EXAMPLE OF MAIN INSPECTION POINTS
-
Visual checks
Inspection of filters
Inspection of magnetic plugs
Oil sampling (for analysis)
Oil level (and replenishment if required)
Compressor cleaning (depending on
operating conditions)
- Ground run test
- ...
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
(refer to MM, chapter 71)
To put the engine back into normal service
as soon as possible
LUBRICATION OIL CHECK
VIBRATION LEVEL
CHECK
BORESCOPIC INSPECTION
DIRECT VISUAL
INSPECTIONS
EXAMPLE OF MAIN TASKS
-
Troubleshooting
Run-down time check
Functional and condition checks
Removal and installation
Adjustments
Miscellaneous procedures (cleaning, storage ...)
Repairs (or replacements)
Particular instructions
FLI
GH
TM
AN
UA
L
POWER
CHECK
PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.23
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS - PRESENTATION
Identification documents
This section describes engine technical documentation used
in 1st and 2nd line maintenance.
- Maintenance Spare Parts Catalogue: contains the
designations and references of the spare parts that may be
required for maintenance on a particular engine variant
Maintenance documents
- Maintenance Manual: describes the engine, its systems and
all the maintenance procedures.
The "standard practices" used in 1st and 2nd line maintenance
are described in chapter 70. They include for example
tightening torques, thread inserts, electrical connectors,
locking of assemblies, etc.
- Service Bulletins: approved by the Authorities and issued to
inform operators of a modification or instruction which affects
operational aspects
- Service Letters: sent to inform operators of certain measures
relating to engine operation
- Modification Index: lists all the modifications relating to a
particular engine variant
- Troubleshooting Book: forms the last volume (chapter
71-00-06) of the Maintenance Manual. It includes:
• A list of failures observed during use
• A list of failures observed during maintenance
• A list of failure codes and their interpretation
• A list of troubleshooting tasks.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
- Maintenance Tools Catalogue: contains the designations and
references of the tools that may be required for maintenance
on a particular engine variant.
Operation documents
- Engine Log Book: records and provides information on the
engine status
- Flight Manual: is the pilot’s basic reference document
and specifies the limitations, the normal and emergency
procedures, and the performance data. It is subject to approval
by the Airworthiness Authorities.
Electronic documentation
- IETP (Interactive Electronic Technical Publication): this
is an electronic version of the maintenance documentation
- TOOLS: this is a website-based service which provides
updates of technical publications such as Service Bulletins,
Service Letters, Maintenance Manuals, etc. Each time an
update is issued, subscribers to the service are immediately
notified and sent a copy of the update by e-mail.
Edition: May 2014
2.24
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MAINTENANCE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
IDENTIFICATION
ARRIEL
ARRIEL
ARRIEL
ARRIEL
ARRIEL
ARRIEL
ARRIEL
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
SERVICE
BULLETINS
SERVICE
LETTERS
MODIFICATION
INDEX
MAINTENANCE
SPARE PARTS
CATALOGUE
MAINTENANCE
TOOLS
CATALOGUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
TYPICAL BREAKDOWN OF A MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ARRIEL
1
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
CHAP
DESIGNATION
00
05
Introduction
Time Limits /
Maintenance Checks
Servicing
Fire Protection
Standard Practices
Power Plant
Engine - Turbine
Engine Fuel and Control
Ignition
Air
Engine Controls
Engine Indicating
Exhaust
Oil
Starting
Accessory Gearboxes
12
26
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
83
CHAP. 71-00-06
TROUBLESHOOTING
Failures observed
during use
Failures observed
during maintenance
Troubleshooting
tasks
1
OPERATION
ENGINE
LOG BOOK
(compiled according to the "ATA 100" standard)
FLI
GH
TM
AN
UA
L
ELECTRONIC
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
PUBLICATION
TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS - PRESENTATION
MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.25
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MAINTENANCE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAINTENANCE
Three types of advisory notice are used in the technical
publications:
- WARNING
Examples
WARNING: do not breathe oil vapours. Do not leave oil in
contact with the skin.
CAUTION: if the flush is being carried out because of metal
particles in the oil system, change the filter and clean the tank
thoroughly.
- CAUTION
- NOTE.
NOTE: take the oil sample before carrying out any replenishment.
Interpretation
WARNING: warns the reader of the possibility of physical harm
(e.g. injury, intoxication, electrocution).
CAUTION: warns the reader of the possibility of damaging the
engine or tooling.
NOTE: gives the reader advice on how best to carry out a task.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.26
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS - ADVISORY NOTICES
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
WARNING
(possibility of
physical harm)
CAUTION
(possibility of damage)
NOTE
(advice)
Examples:
Examples:
Examples:
-
Toxicity of engine oil and vapours
Toxicity of cleaning products
Toxicity of extinguishing products
Eye protection
Fire risk
Electrical discharge from ignition units:
- electrocution
- risks involved with use in an
inflammable atmosphere
- ……
-
Cleaning of titanium parts
Scrapping of O-ring seals
Use of the correct cleaning products
Engine cooling
Engine cleaning after using
extinguishing product
Protection of orifices during
disassembly
Fragility of borescopes
Torque-tightening
……
-
Spectrometric oil analysis
Cycle counting
Installation of O-ring seals
Engine storage
Isolation measures
Procedural changes before or after
modifications
- ……
TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS - ADVISORY NOTICES
MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.27
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAINTENANCE
The International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO) requires that
States establish a safety programme to achieve an acceptable
level of safety in aviation operations. Therefore, States shall in
turn require that individual operators, maintenance organisations,
ATS providers and certified aerodrome operators implement
a Safety Management System (SMS) that is approved by the
State concerned.
The ICAO provides a Safety Management Manual (SMM) which
explains the implementation of an SMS (see below for details).
HUMAN FACTORS
The European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA) requires that
aviation maintenance personnel receive training on Human
Factors (HF).
Such personnel must therefore have initial HF training, followed
by regular refresher training.
The ICAO SHEL(L) model below is a conceptual model
representing the different components involved in human factors,
and is intended as a basic aid to understanding HF:
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Software - The rules, procedures, written documents, etc.,
which are part of standard procedures
Hardware - Tools, equipment, workshops, hangars
Environment - The situation in which the SHEL(L) system must
function, the social and economic climate as
well as the natural environment
Liveware - Human beings (engineers, technicians, aircrew,
managers and administrative personnel)
The edges of the blocks representing these components are
not simple and straight because each component has to be
adapted to the others. When considering HF, all the interfaces
have to be taken into account:
- Liveware - Software
- Liveware - Hardware
- Liveware - Environment
- Liveware - Liveware
Depending on the persons concerned, EASA Part 145
recommends 1 to 3 days' initial training on HF, and further
training every 2 years.
Edition: May 2014
2.28
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
SAFETY MANAGEMENT
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
SOFTWARE
Safety
Management
Manual
(SMM)
HARDWARE
LIVEWARE
LIVEWARE
Safety Management
System
(SMS)
ENVIRONMENT
SAFETY OF AVIATION
OPERATIONS
Software
Hardware
Environment
Liveware
SAFETY MANAGEMENT
HUMAN FACTORS
SAFETY MANAGEMENT - HUMAN FACTORS
MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
2.29
POWER PLANT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
3 - ENGINE
- Engine - Presentation ........................................................................... 3.2
- Axial compressor .................................................................................. 3.6
- Centrifugal compressor ....................................................................... 3.8
- Combustion chamber ........................................................................... 3.10
- Gas generator turbine .......................................................................... 3.12
- Power turbine ........................................................................................ 3.14
- Exhaust system ..................................................................................... 3.16
- Reduction gearbox ............................................................................... 3.18
- Transmission shaft and accessory gearbox ...................................... 3.20
- Engine - Operation ................................................................................ 3.32
- Engine - 1st line maintenance ............................................................. 3.34 - 3.39
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.1
ENGINE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ENGINE - PRESENTATION
Main components
Function
The engine transforms the energy contained in the fuel and air
into mechanical power on a shaft.
Main characteristics
- Type: free-turbine turboshaft engine with forward power drive
via an external shaft
- Gas generator
• Axial compressor
• Centrifugal compressor
• Combustion chamber
• Gas generator turbine
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
- Power turbine
- Exhaust pipe
- Gas generator:
• Speed: 52000 rpm (at 100% N1)
• Direction of rotation: anti-clockwise (ACW)
- Reduction gearbox
- Power turbine:
• Speed: 41600 rpm (at 100% N2)
• Direction of rotation: anti-clockwise (ACW)
- Accessory gearbox.
- Transmission shaft
- Output shaft:
• Speed: 6000 rpm (at 100% N2)
• Direction of rotation: clockwise (CW).
Note: Direction of rotation given viewed from the rear.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.2
ENGINE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Axial
compressor
Centrifugal
compressor
Combustion
chamber
Gas generator
turbine
POWER
TURBINE
EXHAUST
PIPE
Type :
Free-turbine turboshaft engine
with forward power drive via
an external shaft
Gas generator:
52000 rpm (at 100% N1); ACW
Power turbine:
41600 rpm (at 100% N2); CW
Output shaft:
6000 rpm (at 100% N2); CW
ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
TRANSMISSION
SHAFT
REDUCTION
GEARBOX
GENERAL
ENGINE - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.3
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GAS GENERATOR
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ENGINE - PRESENTATION
Note 1: A module is a sub-assembly which can be replaced in
a workshop (2nd line maintenance) without complex
tooling or adaptation work.
Modular design
The engine is made up of 5 modules:
Each module has its own identification plate. The
overall engine identification plate is fitted on the righthand side of the module M01 protection tube.
- Module M01: Transmission shaft and accessory gearbox
- Module M02: Axial compressor
- Module M03: Gas generator HP section
Note 2: A number of accessories are linked to each module.
- Module M04: Power turbine
In these Training Notes, the accessories are dealt with
in the chapters corresponding to the main systems
concerned.
- Module M05: Reduction gearbox.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.4
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
DESCRIPTION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MODULE M02
Axial compressor
MODULE M03
Gas generator
HP section
MODULE M04
Power turbine
MODULE M05
Reduction gearbox
MODULES IDENTIFICATION
PLATES
MODULE M01
Transmission shaft
and accessory gearbox
External identification
plate
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION
PLATE
DESCRIPTION
ENGINE - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.5
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
AXIAL COMPRESSOR
Function
- Stationary components:
• Diffuser
• Casing.
The axial compressor ensures a first stage of compression to
supercharge the centrifugal compressor.
Functional description
Position
The axial compressor ensures a first stage of compression in
order to supercharge the centrifugal compressor.
- At the front of the engine (the axial compressor assembly
forms the module M02).
Compressor airflow
Main characteristics
- Type: axial supercharging compressor
- Airflow: 2.5 kg/sec (5.5 lb/sec.)
The ambient air, admitted through the air intake duct and
guided by the inlet cone, flows between the blades of the axial
compressor wheel. The air is discharged rearwards with an
increased axial velocity.
- Wheel made of titanium, cut from the solid.
The air then flows through the vanes of the diffuser. Due to the
divergent passage, the air velocity decreases and the pressure
increases.
Main components
The flow is straightened by the stator vanes before being
admitted, through an annular duct, to the centrifugal compressor.
- Rotating components:
• Air inlet cone
• Axial wheel
• Shaft
• Bearing
• Accessory drive shaft
Note: In order to avoid compressor surge, a valve discharges
overboard a certain amount of air in certain operating
conditions.
- Rotation speed: N1; ACW
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.6
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PRESENTATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Type:
Axial
supercharging compressor
Airflow:
2.5 kg/s (5.5 lb/sec.)
P1': AIR DISCHARGED
THROUGH THE COMPRESSOR
BLEED VALVE
Rotation speed:
N1; ACW
WHEEL
DIFFUSER
Wheel made of titanium,
cut from the solid
SHAFT
COMPRESSION AND
STRAIGHTENING OF THE AIR
ACCELERATION
OF THE AIR
ADMISSION
OF AMBIENT AIR
AIR INLET
CONE
BEARING
CASING
ACCESSORY
DRIVE SHAFT
SUPERCHARGING OF THE
CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR
PRESENTATION
AXIAL COMPRESSOR
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.7
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR
Function
- Stationary components:
• Diffusers
• Casings.
The compressor supplies the compressed air required for
combustion.
Functional description
Supercharged by the axial compressor, it ensures the second
stage of compression.
The centrifugal compressor ensures the main stage of
compression.
Position
Compressor airflow
- At the front of the module M03.
The air supplied by the axial compressor flows between the
blades of the centrifugal compressor. The air pressure increases
due to the divergent passage between the blades and the air
velocity increases due to the centrifugal flow.
Main characteristics
- Type: centrifugal, high efficiency
- Airflow: 2.5 kg/s (5.5 lb/sec.)
- Compression ratio: 5.4/1 (global: 8.2/1)
- Rotation speed: N1; ACW
- Wheel made of titanium, cut from the solid.
The air leaves the tips of the blades at very high velocity and
then flows through the 1st stage diffuser vanes where the velocity
is decreased and the pressure is increased.
The air then passes through an elbow and the flow becomes
axial. In the 2nd stage diffuser, the velocity is again decreased
and the pressure increased. The air is then admitted into the
combustion chamber.
Main components
- Rotating components:
• Wheel
• Shaft
• Bearing
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.8
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PRESENTATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Airflow:
2.5 kg/s (5.5 lb/sec.)
DIFFUSERS
CASINGS
BEARING
Compression ratio:
5.4/1 (global: 8.2/1)
Rotation speed:
N1; ACW
Wheel made of titanium,
cut from the solid
SUPERCHARGING
BY THE AXIAL
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSION
OF THE AIR IN THE
DIFFUSER STAGES
AIR ADMITTED
INTO THE
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER
ACCELERATION
AND COMPRESSION
OF THE AIR
CENTRIFUGAL
WHEEL
PRESENTATION
CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.9
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Type:
Centrifugal, high efficiency
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
PRESENTATION
Combustion chamber flow
Function
In the combustion chamber, the compressed air is divided into two
flows: a primary air flow mixed with the fuel for combustion and
a secondary air flow (or dilution air flow) for cooling of the gas.
The combustion chamber forms an enclosure in which the air/
fuel mixture is burnt.
Position
- Central section of the gas generator.
A second part flows through the hollow vanes of the turbine
nozzle guide vane (cooling of the vanes) and through the
orifices of the rear swirl plate.
Main characteristics
- Type: annular with centrifugal fuel injection
The primary air is mixed with the fuel sprayed by the injection
wheel. The combustion occurs between the two swirl plates.
The flame temperature reaches approx. 2500°C (4532°F).
- Made of special alloy
Main components
- Secondary air: the secondary air (or dilution air) flows
through the orifices of the mixer unit and the dilution tubes.
It is calibrated to obtain flame stability, cooling of the gas,
and distribution of temperature on the turbine.
- Outer part:
• Front swirl plate
• Mixer unit
- Gas: The gas produced by the combustion is directed into
the turbine nozzle guide vane.
- Inner part:
• Rear swirl plate
• Shroud
- Drain: a combustion chamber drain valve, fitted on a flange
on the bottom of the turbine casing drains overboard any
residual fuel.
- Fuel injection system
- Turbine casing
Operating parameters
- Combustion chamber drain valve.
Functional description
The combustion chamber forms an enclosure in which the fuel/
air mixture is burnt.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
- Primary air: one part flows through the orifices of the front
swirl plate.
The fuel/air ratio for combustion (primary air) is approximately 1/15;
the total fuel/air ratio is approximately 1/45.
The pressure drop in the combustion chamber is approximately
4%.
Edition: May 2014
3.10
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Type:
Annular with centrifugal
fuel injection
Primary air (combustion)
Secondary air (dilution + cooling)
Made of special alloy
OUTER PART
Front swirl
plate
Mixer unit
Gases
INNER PART
Rear swirl
plate
COMPRESSED AIR
Shroud
FUEL
INJECTION
SYSTEM
Combustion chamber
drain valve
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
TURBINE
CASING
FUEL INJECTION
GAS FLOW TO THE
TURBINE
COMBUSTION
(2500°C / 4532°F)
PRESENTATION
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.11
ENGINE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
PRESENTATION
Functional description
Function
The gas generator turbine transforms the kinetic energy
contained in the burnt gases into mechanical power to drive
the compressors and accessories.
The turbine extracts sufficient energy from the gas flow to drive
the compressors and the accessories.
Position
The operation is characterised by the first phase of expansion.
Turbine gas flow
- At the rear of the gas generator.
The gas first flows through the nozzle guide vanes.
The gas velocity increases due to the convergent passage.
Main characteristics
The flow on the blades results in aerodynamic forces whose
resultant causes the rotation of the wheel.
- Type: axial, two stages
- Rotation speed: N1; ACW
- Turbine inlet temperature: approx. 1100°C (2012°F) according
to engine version
The gas, still containing energy, is directed to the power turbine.
- Made of special alloy.
Main components
- Rotating components:
• Wheels
• Shafts
• Bearing
- Stationary components:
• Nozzle guide vanes
• Containment shield
• Casing.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.12
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GAS GENERATOR TURBINE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Rotation
Rotation speed:
N1; ACW
NOZZLE GUIDE
VANES
WHEELS
Turbine inlet temperature:
Approx. 1100°C (2012°F)
according to engine version
Made of special alloy
BEARING
NOZZLE GUIDE VANES
(convergent passage)
Nozzle
guide vane
Turbine
wheel
GAS TO THE
POWER TURBINE
GAS FROM THE
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER
COMPRESSOR
DRIVE
axial, two stages
CONTAINMENT
SHIELD
CASING
SHAFTS
ROTATION
PRESENTATION
GAS GENERATOR TURBINE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.13
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Type:
Axial, two stages
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
PRESENTATION
Functional description
Function
The power turbine transforms the gas energy into mechanical
power to drive the reduction gearbox.
The turbine extracts the energy from the gas to drive the power
shaft through the reduction gearbox.
The operation is characterised by the second phase of expansion.
Position
Turbine flow
- Between the gas generator and the reduction gearbox.
The gases supplied by the gas generator flow through the
nozzle guide vane. In the nozzle guide vane, the gas velocity
increases due to the convergent passage.
It forms the module M04.
Main characteristics
- Type: axial, single stage
- Rotation speed: N2; CW
The gases are directed onto the turbine wheel and the resultant
of the aerodynamic forces on the blades causes the wheel to
rotate. The gases are then discharged overboard through the
exhaust pipe.
- Made of special alloy
Main components
- Rotating components:
• Wheel
• Shaft
• Bearings
- Stationary components:
• Nozzle guide vane
• Containment shield
• Casing.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.14
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
POWER TURBINE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Rotation speed:
N2; CW
NOZZLE GUIDE
VANE
WHEEL
BEARINGS
Made of special alloy
ROTATION OF THE
POWER TURBINE
WHEEL
Rotation
Nozzle guide
vane
Turbine
wheel
REDUCTION
GEARBOX
DRIVE (CW)
GAS FROM THE
GAS GENERATOR
TURBINE
EXPANSION IN THE
NOZZLE GUIDE VANE
CONTAINMENT
SHIELD
POWER
TURBINE CASING
SHAFT
DISCHARGE OF
GASES OVERBOARD
PRESENTATION
POWER TURBINE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.15
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Type:
Axial, single stage
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Functional description
The exhaust system continues the expansion phase and expels
the gas overboard.
The exhaust pipe, which has an elliptical outlet, is made from
stainless steel. It is bolted to the rear flange of the power turbine
casing with the containment shield.
Position
A heat shield is fitted between the exhaust pipe and the reduction
gearbox to protect the gearbox from the exhaust heat.
- Behind the power turbine, around the reduction gear.
The exhaust pipe has a drain at the bottom.
Main characteristics
Functionally it should be noted that the exhaust gas still contains
a certain amount of energy which produces a small residual
thrust.
- Type: elliptical
- Non-modular assembly
- Gas temperature: 600°C (1080°F)
- Made of stainless steel.
Main components
- Exhaust pipe
- Heat shield.
Note: The exhaust pipe is considered to be an SRU.
(Shop Replaceable Unit)
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.16
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
EXHAUST PIPE
EXHAUST
PIPE
Non-modular assembly
HEAT
SHIELD
Gas temperature:
600°C (1080°F)
Reduction
gearbox
Made of stainless steel
HEAT SHIELD
EXHAUST
GAS
HEAT
SHIELD
EXHAUST
PIPE
REDUCTION
GEARBOX
EXHAUST SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
GAS FROM THE
POWER TURBINE
3.17
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Type:
Elliptical
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
REDUCTION GEARBOX
Functional description
- The reduction gear provides a forward output drive at a
reduced speed
Function
The reduction gearbox provides a reduced speed output and
transmits the drive forwards.
- The drive gear is directly driven by the power turbine shaft
(muff coupling drive). It transmits the movement to the
intermediate gear
Position
- The intermediate gear drives the output gear which provides
the power drive.
- At the rear of the engine
- It forms the module M05.
Main characteristics
- Type: 3 stages, helical gears
- Drive gear speed: N2
- Output gear speed: 6000 rpm (except 1S1); CW.
- Gears made of steel
Main components
- Drive gear
- Intermediate gear
- Fork shaped plates
- Output gear
- Casings
- Hydraulic torquemeter.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.18
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PRESENTATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
2 FORK
SHAPED PLATES
MUFF
COUPLING
DRIVE GEAR
INTERMEDIATE
GEAR
INTERMEDIATE
GEAR
N2
DRIVE
GEAR
HYDRAULIC
TORQUEMETER
Type:
3 stages, helical gears
100% N2,
CW
OUTPUT GEAR
Drive gear speed:
N2
OUTPUT
GEAR
Output gear speed:
6000 rpm (except 1S1)
Gears made of steel
CASINGS
PRESENTATION
REDUCTION GEARBOX
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.19
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
Driven accessories
- Starter-generator
Function
- Breather
The shaft transmits the power to the helicopter via the power
off-take at the front of the engine.
- N2 tachometer generator
The accessory gearbox provides the drive for the engine
accessories.
- Oil pump
Position
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
- N1 governor
- N2 tachometer generator
- N2 governor.
- Shaft beneath the engine
- Accessory gearbox at the front of the engine
- This assembly forms the module M01.
Main characteristics
- Type of gears:
• spur gear
• bevel gear.
Main components
- Accessory drive shaft
- Accessory drive train
- Casings.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.20
ENGINE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ACCESSORY
DRIVE SHAFT
(N1)
Type of gears:
Spur gear
Bevel gear
FRONT
CASING
STARTER-GENERATOR
DRIVE GEAR
BREATHER
GEAR
ACCESSORY
DRIVE SHAFT
REAR
CASING
ACCESSORY
DRIVE TRAIN
N1
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR
N1 GOVERNOR
AND OIL PUMP
TRANSMISSION
SHAFT GEAR
POWER
OFF-TAKE
N2 GOVERNOR AND
N2 TACHOMETER GENERATOR
ACCESSORY
DRIVE GEAR
(N2)
TRANSMISSION
SHAFT
GENERAL
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.21
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TRANSMISSION SHAFT - TWIN-ENGINE
CONFIGURATION
Function
Description
The shaft transmits the power to the power off-take and accessory
gearbox. The shaft is located in a protection tube bolted to the
reduction gearbox at the rear and to the accessory gearbox at
the front.
- Lower part of the engine.
The front of the shaft is supported by a ball bearing in the
accessory gearbox front casing. The triangular flange which
forms the power off-take is splined onto the front of the
transmission shaft and is secured by a nut. Sealing of the oil
which lubricates the bearing is ensured by a magnetic carbon
seal.
Main characteristics
Three oil tubes are located between the shaft and the protection
tube.
The shaft transmits the power to the front power off-take.
Position
Hollow steel shaft.
The rear of the shaft is splined into the hub of the output gear
of the reduction gear.
Main components
- Transmission shaft
- Protection tube
- Accessory drive gear
- Power off-take.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.22
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
SHAFT
POWER OFF-TAKE
(triangular flange)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
OUTPUT
GEAR
ACCESSORY
DRIVE GEAR
MAGNETIC
CARBON SEAL
OIL TUBE
PROTECTION
TUBE
FRONT PART
REAR PART
TRANSMISSION SHAFT - TWIN-ENGINE CONFIGURATION
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.23
ENGINE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
Three oil pipes are located within the protection tube.
TRANSMISSION SHAFT - SINGLE ENGINE
CONFIGURATION
A free wheel is mounted on the triangular flange to drive the
power drive shaft which drives the main gearbox and the tail rotor.
Function
The shaft transmits the power to the front and to the rear of
the engine.
Position:
Lubrication of the free wheel and its bearing is by the oil contained
in the free wheel housing, or by the oil system of the engine,
according to the version.
The rear of the transmission shaft is splined into the hub of the
output gear of the reduction gear.
The rear of the tail rotor drive shaft is supported by a ball bearing
in the hub of the output gear. A magnetic carbon seal is fitted
in the rear cover of the gearbox.
- Lower part of the engine.
Main characteristics
Note: In single-engine configuration the free wheel and
transmission shaft front magnetic carbon seal can be
replaced in 1st line maintenance.
- Hollow steel shaft with coaxial drive shaft.
Description
The shaft transmits the power to the power drive shaft. The
transmission shaft is located in a protection tube bolted to the
reduction gearbox at the rear and to the accessory gearbox at
the front.
The front of the transmission shaft is supported by a ball bearing
in the accessory gearbox front casing. A triangular flange is
splined onto the front of the transmission shaft. Sealing of
the oil which lubricates the bearing is ensured by a magnetic
carbon seal.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.24
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
SEAL
TRIANGULAR FLANGE
TAIL ROTOR
DRIVE
SHAFT
ACCESSORY
DRIVE GEAR
POWER DRIVE
SHAFT
FREE WHEEL
MAGNETIC
CARBON SEAL
MAGNETIC
CARBON
SEAL
OIL TUBE
FRONT PART
REAR PART
TRANSMISSION SHAFT - SINGLE ENGINE CONFIGURATION
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.25
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION (1)
The accessory gearbox has four drives on the front face:
• starter-generator (equipped with a magnetic carbon seal
on each side)
• fuel control unit N1
• fuel control unit N2
• power
and mounting bolts on the upper part for attachment of the M02.
It has 3 power drives on the rear face:
• oil pump
• N1 tachometer generator
• N2 tachometer generator
and the protection tube mounting flange, and the accessory
drive shaft passage on the upper part.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.26
ENGINE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MOUNTING
BOLTS
MAGNETIC
CARBON
SEALS
ACCESSORY
DRIVE SHAFT
PASSAGE (N1)
N1
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT N1 DRIVE
OIL
PUMP
STARTERGENERATOR
DRIVE
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT N2 DRIVE
POWER
DRIVE
PROTECTION
TUBE MOUNTING
FLANGE
N2
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION (1)
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.27
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION (2)
The transmission shaft and the accessory box assembly
constitutes the module M01 located at the engine lower part.
The accessory gearbox includes a train of gears housed in
a gearbox formed by two half casings made of light alloy.
The gearbox is installed at the bottom of the axial compressor
by means of four bolts.
The starter-generator gear forms the engine breather.
The fuel control unit N1 gear drives the oil pump at the rear.
The fuel control unit N2 gear is driven by the gear on the
transmission shaft.
The module identification plate is fitted on the front face of the
gearbox.
Note: The engine front support casing is bolted onto the front
face of the accessory gearbox (according to version).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.28
ENGINE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
REAR
CASING
DRIVE
SHAFT
(N1)
N1
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR
TRANSMISSION
SHAFT GEAR
(N2)
Starter-generator
mounting flange
N1
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR
N1 FUEL CONTROL
UNIT AND OIL
PUMP DRIVE
N1 FUEL CONTROL
UNIT AND OIL
PUMP DRIVE
OIL
PUMPS
Identification
plate
N2 FUEL
CONTROL UNIT
AND N2 TACHOMETER
GENERATOR
FRONT
CASING
N2 FUEL
CONTROL UNIT
N2 TACHOMETER
GENERATOR
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION (2)
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.29
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
STARTERGENERATOR /
BREATHER GEAR
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
The operation is considered during engine starting and in
normal running.
The gas generator drives the accessory gear train through the
bevel gear located on the axial compressor shaft.
The following accessories are driven:
Operation during engine starting
During starting, the starter motor drives the accessory gearbox
and thus the gas generator rotating assembly.
The compressors supply air to the combustion chamber and
the starting sequence continues.
At self-sustaining speed the electrical supply to the starter
motor is cut. The starter motor is then mechanically driven by
the engine and operates as a generator to provide DC current
to the aircraft electrical system.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Normal running
- Starter-generator
- FCU: N1 and N2
- Oil pumps
- Tachometer generator: N1 and N2.
Edition: May 2014
3.30
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - OPERATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FWD
STARTER
MOTOR
FWD
DRIVE
SHAFT
DIRECT CURRENT
GENERATOR
DURING
ENGINE STARTING
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
DRIVE
SHAFT
NORMAL RUNNING
(N1 ≥ self-sustaining speed)
ACCESSORY GEARBOX - OPERATION
TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.31
ENGINE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Engine operation can be broken down into the following phases:
compression, combustion, expansion and power transmission.
Expansion
Compression
During this phase, the pressure and temperature of the gases
drop, whilst their velocity increases.
The ambient air is compressed by a supercharging axial
compressor and a centrifugal compressor.
The gases expand through the gas generator turbine, which
extracts the energy required to drive the compressors and
accessories.
This phase is essentially characterised by the airflow (approx.
2.5 kg/s; 5.5 lb/s), the increase in temperature and the
compression ratio (approx. 8.2).
There is a further phase of expansion through the power
turbine, which extracts most of the remaining energy to drive
the output shaft.
Combustion
After the power turbine, the gases are discharged overboard
through the exhaust pipe, giving a slight forward residual thrust.
The compressed air is admitted into the combustion chamber,
mixed with the fuel and burnt in a continuous process.
Power transmission
The air is divided into two flows:
The power is transmitted forwards by a reduction gearbox and
an external transmission shaft.
- A primary flow for combustion
- A secondary flow for dilution and cooling of the gases.
This phase is essentially characterised by an increase in
temperature (flame temperature approx. 2500°C; 4532°F) and
a drop in pressure of about 4%.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Note: The engine reference stations are:
0 - Ambient air
1 - Axial compressor inlet
1' - Axial compressor outlet
2 - Centrifugal compressor outlet
3 - Gas generator turbine inlet
4 - Gas generator turbine outlet
5 - Power turbine outlet.
Edition: May 2014
3.32
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ENGINE - OPERATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Primary air (combustion)
Secondary air (dilution + cooling)
Gases
Residual thrust
EXHAUST
AIRFLOW
2.5 kg/s
(5.5 lb/s)
Fuel
0
1
2
1'
2500
(4532)
3
1125
(2057) 880
(1616)
820
(118.9)
101.3
P kPa (14.7)
(PSI)
T°C
(°F)
V
15
(59)
Air
intake
ADMISSION
160
(23.2)
800
(116)
POWER TRANSMISSION
5
4
600
(1080)
300
(43.5)
320
(608)
108
(15.7)
65
(149)
Values given
for information at a
given reference rating
under ISA conditions
Compressors
Combustion
chamber
COMPRESSION
COMBUSTION
Turbines
Exhaust
EXPANSION
ENGINE - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
(power transmitted
forwards by a reduction
gearbox and an external
transmission shaft)
Edition: May 2014
3.33
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (1)
Scheduled inspections
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.34
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AFTER THE LAST FLIGHT OF THE DAY
MANDATORY
Pre TU197 or pre TU202:
- Make sure that there are no abnormal
noises during gas generator rundown
Note: during engine shut-down or after a ventilation for
a maximum of 5 seconds
- Manually check that the HP gas generator
rotates freely (no abnormal noises)
and visually check that the engine is
in good condition
Note: when T4 is below 150°C
INSPECTION AT 50 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Check the axial compressor blades
(significant impacts, blade distortion)
Chap. 72
INSPECTION AT 100 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Pre TU215 or Pre TU254 or Pre TU255,
Pre TU259:
- Inspection and check of the Module 04 Free turbine
Chap. 72
INSPECTION AT 150 FLIGHT HOURS
INSPECTION AFTER 15 FLIGHT HOURS OR 7 DAYS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection of the axial compressor wheel
(impacts on the leading edge), free rotation
of the rotating assembly, absence of
abnormal noises (rub)
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Check the axial compressor blades
(significant impacts, blade distortion)
OPTIONAL
Pre TU244:
- Inspection and check of the combustion
chamber
INSPECTION AT 30 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Pre TU347:
- Visual inspection of the free turbine blades
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (1)
ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.35
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (2)
Scheduled inspections
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.36
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 300 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Pre TU244:
- Inspection and check of the combustion
chamber
Post TU215 or Post TU254 or
Post TU255, Post TU259:
- Inspection and check of the Module 04 Free turbine
OPTIONAL
- Inspection and check of the heat shield
(free from cracks, correct attachment)
- Inspection and check of the exhaust pipe
assembly (free from cracks,
correct attachment)
INSPECTION AT 400 FLIGHT HOURS
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
MANDATORY
- Vibration check at the engine rear part
Chap. 71
Note: Operation in a dusty atmosphere
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
- Do a check of the rotating components
of the axial compressor
Chap. 72
Note: Engines which operate in erosive atmosphere as
per SB No. A292 72 0230
Note: If blade wear is incorrect, do a check for
anomalies on the stationary parts of
axial compressor
INSPECTION AT 500 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Borescope inspection of 1st stage turbine
blades of gas generator
Post TU244:
- Inspection and check of the combustion
chamber
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (2)
ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.37
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (3)
Scheduled inspections
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.38
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 3,000 FLIGHT HOURS
INSPECTION AT 750 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Do a check of the rotating components of
the axial compressor
Chap. 72
Note: Non-erosive atmosphere
Note: If blade wear is incorrect, do a check for
anomalies on the stationary parts of axial
compressor
Do a vibration check at rear point
Chap. 71
Note: Non-dusty atmosphere
Inspection and check of the heat shield
(free from cracks, correct attachment)
Chap. 72
Inspection and check of the exhaust pipe
assembly (free from cracks,
correct attachment)
Chap. 72
INSPECTION AT 1,000 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Check casing condition (no leakage on
the various mating faces)
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Pre TU275:
- Intermediate inspection of Module 02
Note: Module 02 must be removed
Chap. 72
INSPECTION AT 3,600 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Post TU275:
- Intermediate inspection of Module 02
Chap. 72
Note: Module 02 must be removed
Post TU215 or Post TU255, Post TU259:
- Intermediate inspection of Module 04
Chap. 72
Note: Module 04 must be removed
Replacement of the free turbine front bearing
Chap. 72
Note: The engine must be removed
Inspection and check of Module 01
Chap. 72
Note: Module 01 must be removed
Note: The embodiment of these tasks must be
mentioned on the Module 01's log card
INSPECTION AT 1,200 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Examine the coupling sleeve
Chap. 72
Note: Only perform if the engine is not followed by
spectrometric oil analysis every 100 hours
Note: Module 05 must be removed
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (3)
ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
3.39
ENGINE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
4 - OIL SYSTEM
- Oil system - Presentation ..................................................................... 4.2
- Oil tank - Oil cooler - Oil pressure transmitter ................................... 4.6
- Oil pumps .............................................................................................. 4.8
- Oil filter .................................................................................................. 4.10
- Oil filter pre-blockage indicator ........................................................... 4.14
- Low oil pressure switch ....................................................................... 4.16
- Electrical magnetic plugs ..................................................................... 4.18
- Mechanical magnetic plugs ................................................................. 4.20
- Strainers ................................................................................................ 4.22
- Centrifugal breather .............................................................................. 4.24
- Oil system - Operation .......................................................................... 4.26
- External oil pipes ................................................................................. 4.28
- Oil system - 1st line maintenance ....................................................... 4.30 - 4.35
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.1
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
Lubrication requirements
Function
Lubrication is required for the following components:
The oil system lubricates and cools the engine.
- Gas generator front bearings
• Axial compressor bearing
• Centrifugal compressor bearing
Position
All the system components are located on the engine, except
the oil tank and cooler.
- Gas generator rear bearing
Main characteristics
- Reduction gearbox bearings and gears
- Type: variable pressure, full flow, dry sump, synthetic oil
- Accessory gearbox bearings and gears.
- Max. oil temperature: 115°C (239°F)
- Power turbine bearings
Sealing
- Min. oil pressure: 90 or 130 kPa (13 or 18.85 PSIG)
according to version
The 3 gas generator bearings and the power turbine front
bearing are sealed by pressurised labyrinth seals with abradable
coatings.
- Max. oil pressure: 800 kPa (116 PSIG)
- Max. oil consumption: 0.3 l/h or 0.15 l/h according to version.
Note: For oil specification tables and precautions, refer to
Maintenance Manual chapter 71.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.2
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
GAS GENERATOR
REAR
BEARING
FRONT
BEARINGS
Engine
lubrication
POWER TURBINE
FRONT
BEARING
REAR
BEARINGS
Engine
cooling
Type:
Variable pressure, full flow,
dry sump, synthetic oil
Max. oil temperature:
115°C (239°F)
Min. oil pressure:
90 or 130 kPa
(13 or 18.85 PSIG)
according to version
Max. oil pressure:
800 kPa (116 PSIG)
Max. oil consumption:
0.3 l/h or 0.15 l/h
according to version
BEARINGS
GEARS
BEARINGS
ACCESSORY GEARBOX
GEARS
REDUCTION GEARBOX
Sealing:
The 3 gas generator bearings and the power turbine front bearing
are sealed by pressurised labyrinth seals with abradable coatings.
GENERAL
OIL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.3
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
The system contains all the components necessary for engine
lubrication.
Oil tank
The tank contains the volume of oil required to lubricate the
engine. It is supplied by the aircraft manufacturer.
Oil pumps
The pump unit contains one pressure pump and three scavenge
pumps. The gear type pumps are driven by the accessory
gearbox. The pressure pump is equipped with a pressure-relief
valve and, on some versions, a check valve.
Oil filter
The filter retains any particles which may be present in the oil.
It is provided with a by-pass valve and a pre-blockage indicator.
A check valve is fitted downstream of the scavenge pumps, on
the general oil return line to the oil tank.
Oil cooler
The oil cooler cools the oil. It is supplied by the aircraft
manufacturer.
Centrifugal breather
The centrifugal breather separates the oil from the air/oil mist
and vents the system.
Indicating devices
- Oil temperature probe (supplied by the aircraft manufacturer)
- Pre-blockage indicator
Strainers
The strainers protect the scavenge pumps from debris in the
system.
- Low oil pressure switch
- Pressure transmitter
- Magnetic plugs
Magnetic plugs
Mechanical magnetic plugs are fitted upstream of the scavenge
pumps. An electrical magnetic plug is fitted at the general
scavenge outlet, another one at the rear bearing of the gas
generator scavenge.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Check valve (general oil return line to oil tank)
- Electrical magnetic plugs.
Edition: May 2014
4.4
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
DESCRIPTION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Low oil
pressure switch
ENGINE
Oil
temperature
probe
Check valve
(some versions)
Pressurerelief valve
TANK
Check
valve
Electrical
magnetic plug
CENTRIFUGAL
BREATHER
Pre-blockage
indicator
By-pass
valve
COOLER
Scavenge
pumps
Pressure
transmitter
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
AIRFRAME
Pressure
pump
FILTER
Magnetic
plug
Electrical
magnetic plug
Magnetic
plug
STRAINERS
OIL PUMPS
DESCRIPTION
OIL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.5
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Main characteristics
Oil tank
- Type: air-oil cooler
- Differential and thermostatic by-pass valve
Function
The tank contains the oil required for engine lubrication.
Oil pressure transmitter
Position
Function
- On the aircraft: it is installed with the oil cooler above the
plenum chamber, between the main gearbox and the front
firewall.
The transmitter provides a signal of oil pressure to the instrument
panel.
Main components
Position
- In the system: in the supply system, downstream of the filter
- Filler cap, level indicator, drain plug (with magnetic plug),
temperature probe and unions (supply, return and vent).
- On the engine: screwed into the filter base.
Oil cooler
- Output signal: voltage proportional to the oil pressure.
Main characteristics
Function
The oil cooler cools the oil after it has passed through the engine.
Position
- In the system: between the scavenge pumps and the tank
- On the aircraft: it is installed on the oil tank above the plenum
chamber between the main gearbox and the front firewall.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Note 1: All these components are supplied by the aircraft
manufacturer. Refer to the aircraft manufacturer
documentation.
Note 2: On the 1E2 version only, the oil pressure transmitter
is supplied by TURBOMECA.
Edition: May 2014
4.6
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
OIL TANK - OIL COOLER - OIL PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
All these components
are supplied by the aircraft
manufacturer. Refer to the
aircraft manufacturer
documentation.
AIRFRAME
OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
Electrical
signal to the
cockpit
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ENGINE
OIL TANK
OIL COOLER
OIL TANK - OIL COOLER - OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.7
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL PUMPS
- The pump casing provided with inlet and outlet orifices
Function
- The pressure-relief valve
- The check valve (according to version).
Position
- On the engine: the pump pack is mounted on the rear face
of the accessory gearbox.
Main characteristics
- Type: gear
- Pressure pump outlet pressure: approx. 300 kPa (43.5 PSI)
(variable pressure system)
- Pressure-relief valve setting: 800 kPa (116 PSI)
Description
The oil pump unit is mounted on the rear left face of the accessory
gearbox and is driven at a speed proportional to N1.
- 4 gear type pumps:
• Pressure pump
• Gas generator rear bearing scavenge pump
• Reduction gearbox scavenge pump
• Accessory gearbox scavenge pump
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
The pressure pump draws the oil from the tank and pumps it
to the filter.
The scavenge pumps draw the oil from the casings and pump
it to the cooler.
Pressure-relief valve operation
If the oil pressure exceeds the valve setting the valve opens
and allows the oil to return to the pump inlet.
- Check valve: according to version.
It consists of:
Operation
In normal operation the valve is closed and only opens
in exceptional circumstances, e.g. starting with very low
temperature.
Pressure pump outlet check valve operation
When the oil pressure is very low, e.g. engine stopped or at the
beginning of start, the valve is closed in order to prevent flow
between the oil pressure pump and the oil system.
Edition: May 2014
4.8
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
The pumps ensure oil circulation.
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Check valve
(according
to version)
Pressurerelief valve
From oil tank
PUMP
UNIT
Type:
Gear
Oil filter
Pressure pump outlet pressure:
Approx. 300 kPa (43.5 PSI)
(variable pressure system)
To lubrication
To oil
cooler
From
engine
Pressure-relief valve setting:
800 kPa (116 PSI)
Check valve:
According to version
Normal
running condition
(valve closed)
Overpressure
(valve open)
PRESSURE-RELIEF VALVE OPERATION
Scavenge
pumps
Pressure
pump
OIL PUMPS
DRIVE SHAFT
Normal
running condition
(valve open)
Engine stopped
and initial phase
of starting
(valve closed)
PUMP BODY
PRESSURE PUMP OUTLET CHECK
VALVE OPERATION
OIL PUMPS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.9
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL FILTER
Main components
Function
- Filter base
The filter retains particles that may be in the oil.
- Pre-blockage indicator (pre-blockage pressure switch on
1E version)
Position
- Cover
- In the system: downstream of the pressure pump
- By-pass valve.
- On the engine: on the left rear face of the accessory gearbox.
Main characteristics
- Type: metal cartridge
- Filtering ability: 30 microns
- Mechanical pre-blockage indicator: ∆P 150 kPa
(21.7 PSID)
- By-pass valve setting: ∆P 200 kPa (29 PSID).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.10
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FILTER
BASE
PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
(pre-blockage
pressure switch
on 1E version)
BY-PASS
VALVE
Type:
Metal cartridge
Filtering ability:
30 microns
Mechanical pre-blockage
indicator:
∆P 150 kPa (21.7 PSID)
Pressurerelief valve
Check valve
(according
to version)
Pre-blockage
indicator
To lubrication
From oil tank
By-pass valve setting:
∆P 200 kPa (29 PSID)
By-pass valve
FILTER
GENERAL
OIL FILTER
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.11
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
COVER
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL FILTER
Operation
Description
Normal condition (filtering)
The main components of the filtering unit are the following:
The oil supplied by the pressure pump passes through the
filter from outside to inside. The filtered oil then passes to the
engine for lubrication.
- Filter base
- Filter cover
Pre-blockage
- Metal cartridge (filtering element)
If the filter begins to become blocked the pressure difference
across the filter increases. At a given difference, a red mechanical
indicator pops out. The oil continues to flow through the filter.
- By-pass valve (fitted inside the filter base)
- Drain valve.
The filter base incorporates mounting points for the following:
- Pre-blockage indicator
Blockage
If the pressure difference exceeds the by-pass valve setting, the
by-pass valve opens and unfiltered oil passes to the system.
- Low oil pressure switch
- Oil pressure transmitter.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.12
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
DESCRIPTION - OPERATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
FILTER
COVER
FILTERING
ELEMENT
LOW OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH
PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
OIL PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
BY-PASS
VALVE
NORMAL CONDITION
OPERATION OF
THE MECHANICAL
PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
PRE-BLOCKAGE
BY-PASS
VALVE
DRAIN
VALVE
FILTER
BASE
PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
BLOCKAGE
OPERATION OF THE
BY-PASS VALVE
DESCRIPTION - OPERATION
OIL FILTER
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.13
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
OIL FILTER
(filtering 30 microns)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL FILTER PRE-BLOCKAGE INDICATOR
Operation
The indicator indicates the onset of filter blockage.
Normal operation
Position
Filter downstream pressure plus spring pressure is greater
than upstream pressure. The two pistons are held together by
magnetic force. The indicator is not visible.
On the left face of the filter housing.
Main characteristics
-
Pre-blockage
Type: differential
Setting: ∆P 150 kPa (21.7 PSID)
Indication: red indicator
Manual rearming.
Filter upstream pressure exceeds downstream plus spring
pressure and the ∆P piston displaces.
This breaks the magnetic hold and the indicator piston is pushed
out by its spring. The indicator is visible.
Description
The bi-metallic thermal lock ensures that the indicator is not
triggered by a low oil temperature (locked below 50°C (122°F)).
The pre-blockage indicator comprises the following parts:
- Indicator body including:
• Filter upstream pressure inlet
• Filter downstream pressure inlet
- Red indicator piston
- ∆P piston
- Transparent cover
- Thermal lock
- O-ring seals ensure the filter pre-blockage indicator sealing.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
It is re-armed by removing the cover and pushing in the indicator.
Note: In the 1E version, the filter pre-blockage indicator is
replaced by a filter pre-blockage pressure switch.
Edition: May 2014
4.14
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
INDICATOR
BODY
< 50°C (122°F)
> 50°C (122°F)
Thermal lock
operation
Downstream
pressure
Type:
Differential
RED
INDICATOR
Setting:
∆P 150 kPa (21.7 PSID)
Upstream
pressure
NORMAL OPERATION
Indication:
Red indicator
Manual re-arming
Pressurerelief valve
From oil tank
Check valve
(according
to version)
PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
Red indicator
out
Downstream
pressure
To lubrication
Upstream
pressure
PRE-BLOCKAGE
OIL FILTER PRE-BLOCKAGE INDICATOR
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.15
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TRANSPARENT
COVER
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
LOW OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
The low oil pressure switch detects low oil system pressure
and provides cockpit indication.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
Position
- In the system: downstream of the filter
- On the engine: fitted on the filter base.
Main characteristics
- Type: diaphragm pressure switch
- Setting: 90 or 130 kPa (13 or 18.9 PSI) (according to version)
- Indication: light on instrument panel.
Functional description
The pressure switch microswitch is open during normal engine
operation.
If the oil pressure reduces to less than the low oil pressure
switch setting, the diaphragm moves down. This causes the
electrical contact to close, completing the circuit of the low oil
pressure warning light.
An O-ring seal ensures the sealing between the pressure switch
and the filter base.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.16
OIL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
ELECTRICAL
CONTACT
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
LOW OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH
From filter
(pressure pump)
WARNING LIGHT
(instrument panel)
+28 VDC
PLUNGER
DIAPHRAGM
From filter
Type:
Diaphragm pressure switch
Setting:
90 or 130 kPa
(13 or 18.9 PSI)
according to version
Indication:
Light on instrument panel
To lubrication
LOW OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.17
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ELECTRICAL MAGNETIC PLUGS
The electrical magnetic plugs provide a cockpit indication of
metal particles in the oil system.
Position
A resistor is connected across the gap. The plugs are connected,
via the engine electrical harness, to the aircraft instrument panel
with an optional test system.
The plugs are fitted into a housing which is provided with a
self-sealing valve.
The scavenge oil flows across the magnetic probe.
- In the system:
• one downstream of the scavenge pumps
• one upstream of the rear bearing scavenge pump
- On the engine:
• one near the pump assembly (scavenge pumps)
• one on the left side of the accessory gearbox
(rear bearing).
Note: The oil system also has two mechanical magnetic plugs
located on the lower part of the accessory gearbox and
on the lower part of the reduction gearbox.
Operation
The magnetic probe attracts magnetic particles present in the oil.
If it attracts sufficient particles to form a bridge across the gap,
this will complete the electrical circuit between the two magnetic
parts and thus illuminate an indicator on the instrument panel.
Main characteristics
- Type:
• Magnetic with electrical indication
• Self-sealing housing.
The resistor is fitted to allow the installation of a test circuit.
Description
Note: Refer to aircraft documents for further details.
The electrical magnetic plugs comprise a magnetic probe which
has two parts which are electrically insulated from one another
and have a small gap between them.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.18
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Type:
Electrical
magnetic plug
Housing:
Self-sealing
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
PLUG BODY
Strainer
To oil
cooler
From
engine
GAP
ELECTRICAL
MAGNETIC PLUG
Scavenge pumps
Firewall
AIRCRAFT
Resistor
HOUSING
ENGINE
GAP
+
SELF-SEALING
VALVE
INDICATOR
ELECTRICAL
MAGNETIC PLUG
ELECTRICAL MAGNETIC PLUGS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.19
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Main components
The mechanical magnetic plugs retain magnetic particles
contained in the oil to provide a rapid and frequent check of
the internal condition of the engine.
- Self sealing housing:
• Housing
• O-ring seal
• Valve
• Spring
Position
In the system:
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MECHANICAL MAGNETIC PLUGS
- Magnetic plug:
• Magnet
• O-ring seal(s)
• Locating pins or notches.
- One on the reduction gearbox scavenge return
- One on the accessory gearbox scavenge return.
On the engine:
- One at the bottom of the reduction gearbox
- One at the bottom of the accessory gearbox.
They are mounted on the left or the right side according to the
position of the engine in the helicopter.
Main characteristics
- Type:
• Single magnetic pole
• Self-sealing housing
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.20
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
LOCATING PINS
O-RING SEALS
O-RING
SEAL
HOUSING
AFTER TU 308A
BEFORE TU 308A
MAGNET
Type:
Single magnetic pole
Self-sealing housing
NORMAL POSITION
SPRING
MAGNET
To
scavenge
pumps
MECHANICAL
MAGNETIC
PLUGS
LOCATING
PIN
REMOVED POSITION
MECHANICAL MAGNETIC PLUGS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
O-RING
SEALS
Edition: May 2014
4.21
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
VALVE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Main components
The strainers protect the scavenge pumps against large particles
which might be in the oil.
- Strainer body
Position
- Mounting flange
- In the system: they are fitted in each scavenge line upstream
of the scavenge pump
- O-ring seal.
- On the engine:
• Two strainers are located on the accessory gearbox
casing (reduction gearbox and accessory gearbox
scavenge)
• One strainer is located on the oil pump assembly (gas
generator rear bearing scavenge)
Functional description
- Wide-mesh filter
A strainer is a wide-mesh filter which retains any large particles
which may be present in the oil in order to protect the scavenge
pumps.
Main characteristics
- Type: wide-mesh filter.
Note: The rear bearing strainer is fitted in the electrical magnetic
plug housing (post TU 208).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.22
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
STRAINERS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Type:
Wide-mesh filter
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Gas generator rear bearing
strainer
GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARING
STRAINER
(POST TU 208)
Accessory gearbox
strainer
Reduction gearbox
strainer
ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
AND REDUCTION
GEARBOX
STRAINERS
STRAINER
To oil
cooler
From
engine
GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARING
STRAINER
(PRE TU 208)
To
scavenge
pumps
STRAINERS
STRAINERS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.23
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Operation
The centrifugal breather separates the oil from the air/oil mist
created by the oil system.
The centrifugal breather is driven by the intermediate gear of
the accessory drive.
Position
When the engine is running, the air/oil mist passes through
the breather.
It is formed by the starter-generator drive gear in the accessory
gearbox.
- Centrifugal force throws the oil droplets out into the gearbox
where they fall to the bottom of the casing
Main characteristics
- The de-oiled air passes out through the shaft, via a gearbox
passage, into an external pipe which discharges into the
exhaust.
- Type: centrifugal
- De-oiled air: through the rear of the hollow shaft.
Description
The centrifugal breather is formed by the starter-generator drive
gear. This gear is formed in one piece with a hollow shaft and
has holes which provide a passage between the gearbox and
the air vent.
The gear is supported by two ball bearings and has a magnetic
carbon seal at each end. Only the front magnetic carbon seal
can be replaced in 1st line maintenance.
The breather air outlet is at the rear end of the shaft, where the
air passes into the gearbox outlet.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.24
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CENTRIFUGAL BREATHER
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Type:
Centrifugal
De-oiled air:
Through the rear
of the hollow shaft
Oil droplets
(expelled by
centrifugal force)
AIR/OIL MIST
- from accessory gearbox
- from gas generator bearings
- from power turbine bearings
- from reduction gearbox
MAGNETIC
CARBON SEAL
STARTERGENERATOR
DRIVE GEAR
AIR VENT
DE-OILED AIR
De-oiled air
(to air vent)
Air/Oil
mist
STARTERGENERATOR
DRIVE
BREATHER
HOLES
OIL DROPLETS
CENTRIFUGAL BREATHER
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
MAGNETIC
CARBON SEAL
Edition: May 2014
4.25
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Supply
The pressure pump draws the oil from the tank and supplies the
system. A pressure-relief valve limits the maximum pressure by
returning oil to the pressure pump inlet above a certain pressure.
The oil is then delivered through a check valve, the oil filter
and a calibrated orifice to the parts of the engine which require
lubrication:
- Gas generator front bearings
Scavenge
After lubrication, the oil falls by gravity to the bottom of the
sumps. The oil is then immediately drawn away by the scavenge
pumps and returned to the tank through the oil cooler (dry sump
system).
Strainers protect the scavenge pumps against any particles
which may be in the oil.
A check valve, located downstream of the scavenge pumps,
prevents any oil flow from the oil tank to the engine when the
pressure is very low (engine stopped).
- Gas generator rear bearing
Magnetic plugs attract and retain any magnetic particles which
may be in the oil.
- Power turbine bearings
Breathing
- Reduction gearbox
The air/oil mist which results from lubrication is returned to the
accessory gearbox, where the oil is separated from the air by
a centrifugal breather, which vents overboard.
- Accessory gearbox and torquemeter (supply upstream of the
calibrated orifice).
The oil is sprayed by jets onto the parts to be lubricated.
The gas generator rear bearing has a direct air vent.
Indication
The system provides the following indications: pressure,
temperature, low pressure, electrical magnetic plug and filter
pre-blockage.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.26
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
The main functions of the oil system are: supply, scavenge,
breathing and indication.
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
AIRFRAME
ENGINE
SUCTION
SUPPLY
PRESSURISATION
SCAVENGE
BREATHING
AIR VENT
OIL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
4.27
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
EXTERNAL OIL PIPES
Breathing pipe
The external oil pipes carry the oil to and from the various
components of the oil system and the parts of the engine that
require lubrication (bearings).
- Oil tank breathing pipe (supplied by the aircraft manufacturer)
- Breathing T-union
- Oil system breathing pipe (to exhaust pipe).
Main characteristics
- Type of pipes: rigid, stainless steel
Air vent pipes
- Type of unions: standard (connecting flange with bolts).
- Gas generator rear bearing air vent pipe (overboard).
Description
The external oil pipes can be divided into 4 categories:
Supply pipes
- Oil inlet pipe (from oil tank to pressure pump; supplied by the
aircraft manufacturer)
- Gas generator front bearings supply pipe
- Low oil pressure switch and oil pressure transmitter supply
pipe
- Gas generator rear bearing supply pipe.
Scavenge pipes
- Gas generator rear bearing scavenge pipe
- Oil outlet pipe (from scavenge pumps to oil cooler; supplied
by the aircraft manufacturer).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.28
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
LOW OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH AND OIL
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
SUPPLY PIPE
GAS GENERATOR
FRONT BEARINGS
SUPPLY PIPE
GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARINGS
SUPPLY PIPE
GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARING
AIR VENT PIPE
OIL SUPPLY
PIPE
GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARING
SCAVENGE PIPE
Type of pipes:
Rigid, stainless steel
EXTERNAL OIL PIPES
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.29
OIL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (1)
Scheduled inspections
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.30
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 30 FLIGHT HOURS
TURN-AROUND INSPECTION
MANDATORY
Inspection of oil level in tank and
top up if required
Aircraft documentation
INSPECTION AFTER THE LAST FLIGHT OF THE DAY
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection of oil level in tank and
top up if required
Aircraft documentation
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
- Inspection and cleaning of the
mechanical magnetic plug of accessory
gearbox
Post TU232:
- Inspection and cleaning of the
mechanical magnetic plug
of reduction gear
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
INSPECTION AT 100 FLIGHT HOURS
INSPECTION AFTER 15 FLIGHT HOURS OR 7 DAYS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Pre TU232:
- Inspection and cleaning of the mechanical
magnetic plug of reduction gear
Visually check that there are no leaks
on the rear bearing oil ducts
Check the visual blockage indicator
of the oil filter
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
S.O.A. inspection
Chap. 71
Note: When Module 02 or Module 04 have been
operated for more than 3,000 hours after the
manufacturing or the last general overhaul
Pre TU274, Pre TU281, Pre TU283, Pre TU284:
- Inspection of the rear bearing
(for clogging)
Chap. 72
Pre TU208:
- Inspection and cleaning of the
strainer of the oil return pipe of
the rear bearing
Chap. 72
Post TU208:
- Inspection and cleaning of the strainer
of the oil return pipe of the rear bearing
Chap. 79
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (1)
OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.31
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (2)
Scheduled inspections
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.32
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 150 FLIGHT HOURS
INSPECTION AT 300 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection of the filtering element
Chap. 72
OPTIONAL
S.O.A. inspection
Chap. 71
Note: When Module 02 or Module 04 have been not
operated for more than 3,000 hours after the
manufacturing or the last general overhaul
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection and cleaning of the
electrical magnetic plugs at oil outlet
Chap. 79
Post TU208:
- Inspection and cleaning of the
electrical magnetic plugs at gas
generator rear bearing oil return
Chap. 79
Inspection and check of the low oil
pressure switch
Chap. 79
Inspection and check of the oil pump
Chap. 79
Oil draining
Chap. 79
Note: Use of ROYCO 560, ASTO 560 and ETO 2380
type oils
INSPECTION AT 200 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Post TU274, Post TU281, Post TU283,
Post TU284:
- Inspection of the rear bearing
(for clogging)
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Chap. 72
INSPECTION AT 750 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Oil draining
Note: No use of ROYCO 560, ASTO 560
and ETO 2380 type oils
Make sure the three hollow struts
for the passage of the rear-bearing
oil-tubes are serviceable
Chap. 79
Chap. 72
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (2)
OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.33
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (3)
Scheduled inspections
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.34
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 1,000 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Pre TU274, Pre TU281, Pre TU283,
Pre TU284:
- Cleaning of the rear bearing
Post TU274, Post TU281, Post TU283,
Post TU284:
- Remove, cleaning and installation of the oil
scavenge tube of the rear bearing
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (3)
OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
4.35
OIL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
5 - AIR SYSTEM
- Air system - Presentation .................................................................... 5.2
- Internal air system ................................................................................ 5.4
- Air tappings ........................................................................................... 5.6
- Compressor bleed valve ...................................................................... 5.8
- External air pipes .................................................................................. 5.16
- Air system - 1st line maintenance ....................................................... 5.18 - 5.19
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.1
AIR SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
AIR SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
The air system includes:
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
- An internal air system which:
• Pressurises the labyrinth seals
• Cools certain internal engine parts
• Balances the forces on the rotating assemblies
- Air tappings which are used to:
• Ventilate the start injectors
• Supply air to control compressor bleed valve operation
• Supply the aircraft air system
• Supply air to the FCU metering unit
- The compressor bleed valve.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.2
AIR SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
AIR TAPPINGS
- Ventilate the start injectors
- Supply air to control compressor bleed valve operation
- Supply the aircraft air system
- Supply air to the FCU metering unit
INTERNAL AIR SYSTEM
- Pressurises the labyrinth seals
- Cools certain internal engine parts
- Balances the forces on the rotating assemblies
COMPRESSOR BLEED
VALVE
AIR SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.3
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
INTERNAL AIR SYSTEM
Gas generator HP section
The internal air system pressurises the labyrinth seals, cools
certain internal engine parts, and balances the forces on the
rotating assemblies.
Position
All the components making up the system are internal parts
of the engine, except for the power turbine labyrinth seal
pressurisation pipe, which is an external pipe.
Main characteristics
- Type: pressurised air tappings with a calibrated flow
Air tapped from the centrifugal compressor is used to pressurise
the labyrinth seal on the shaft.
The air from the centrifugal compressor outlet flows through
the hollow nozzle guide vanes (1st stage) and through holes
in the shroud. It is used to:
- Cool the nozzle guide vane and the front face of the gas
generator turbine
- Cool the front and rear faces of the gas generator turbines
(discharging into the gas flow)
- Pressurise the labyrinth seals of the gas generator rear bearing
(small flow into the bearing housing) and the injection wheel.
- Airflow: approx. 2% of the total engine flow.
The centrifugal compressor casing is fitted with air tapping points.
This air is called clean air as it is out of the main air flow stream.
Note: The internal air system is also referred to as the secondary
air system.
Power turbine section
Functional description
The internal air system can be divided into 3 sections:
Front section
Air tapped from the centrifugal compressor inlet is used to
pressurise the front bearing labyrinths. There is a very small
flow of air into the bearing chamber.
Air tapped from the same point is discharged through the
compressor bleed valve, mounted on the compressor casing
(see compressor bleed valve).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Air tapped from the combustion chamber (P2 air) is taken
by an external pipe to the reduction gearbox casing (except
on post TU356 1E2 and 1S versions: the air is tapped from
the compressor bleed valve control air tapping union). It then
passes through internal passages to pressurise the labyrinth
seal on the power turbine shaft and to cool the rear face of the
power turbine.
A circulation of P0 air, induced by venturi effect, cools the gas
generator rear bearing chamber, and then flows through the
power turbine nozzle guide vanes, cooling them and then joins
the gas flow.
Edition: May 2014
5.4
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Post TU 356
1E2 and 1S versions
P0
FRONT SECTION
INTERNAL AIR SYSTEM
GAS GENERATOR HP SECTION (post TU 360)
Post TU 356
1E2 and 1S versions
- Internal passages
- External pipe
External pipe for the power turbine
labyrinth seal pressurisation
Type:
Pressurised air tappings with a calibrated flow
Airflow:
Approx. 2% of the total engine flow
P0 (atmospheric pressure)
P1' (centrifugal compressor inlet pressure)
P2 (centrifugal compressor outlet pressure)
POWER TURBINE SECTION
INTERNAL AIR SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.5
AIR SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Aircraft services
Air tappings are used for:
Compressor delivery air is tapped off for use in various aircraft
systems.
- Fuel control
The engine has two air tapping unions (used for the aircraft
services) on the centrifugal compressor casing.
- Start injector ventilation
- Aircraft services
Note: The use of this bleed is restricted during take-off.
- Bleed valve operation
- Air intake anti-icing.
Bleed valve operation
Fuel control
Compressor delivery air is tapped to operate the compressor
bleed valve.
P2 air is used for the acceleration control unit (for all versions)
and the deceleration (in some versions 1C, 1D, 1K, 1E, 1S,...).
Air intake anti-icing
The system includes a pressure tapping and a pipe between
the tapping union and the FCU.
Start injector ventilation
1S:
P2 air is used for air intake anti-icing.
The system includes an air tapping point, a pipeline which passes
forward through the front firewall, an electro-valve, a pressure
switch and the double skinned air intake duct.
Compressor delivery air is used to ventilate the start injectors
to avoid blockage by the carbonisation of unburnt fuel.
The system comprises a tapping union and a pipe connected
to the start electro-valve.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.6
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
AIR TAPPINGS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ACCELERATION
CONTROL UNIT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
DECELERATION
CONTROL UNIT
AIRCRAFT SERVICES
1S: AIR INTAKE
ANTI-ICING
P0
P0
P2
SIGNAL FOR THE
FUEL CONTROL
P2
BLEED VALVE
OPERATION
AIR TAPPINGS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
START INJECTOR
VENTILATION
5.7
AIR SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE
Principle
Function
The compressor bleed valve prevents compressor surge at
low N1 speed.
Position
The valve prevents compressor surge by bleeding off a certain
quantity of air tapped from the axial compressor outlet. When the
valve is open, the discharge of air causes the air flow through
the axial compressor to increase thus moving the working line
away from the surge line.
- In the system: between the axial and centrifugal compressors
- On the engine: at the top of the counter-casing.
Main characteristics
- Type: pneumatic or electro-pneumatic (according to version)
- Control:
• by P2/P0 pressure ratio (pneumatic type)
• as a function of N1 (electro-pneumatic type).
Note: The air can be discharged under the cowling in order
to improve cooling of the engine compartment.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.8
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Type:
Pneumatic or electro-pneumatic
(according to version)
Control:
- P2/P0 pressure ratio
(pneumatic type)
- As a function of N1
(electro-pneumatic type)
P1': AIR DISCHARGED
THROUGH THE COMPRESSOR
BLEED VALVE
P2/P0 PRESSURE
RATIO
COMPRESSION AND
STRAIGHTENING OF THE AIR
Surge
line
Working line
(valve closed)
ADMISSION OF
AMBIENT AIR
Working line
(valve open)
AIRFLOW
G
GENERAL
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.9
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE
Operation
Description
Closing
This compressor bleed valve includes 3 main parts: the
tachometer box, the control electro-valve and the bleed valve.
When the N1 reaches 96% the tachometer box closes the
electrical contact which actuates the control electro-valve to
the open position. P2 pressure pushes the piston which closes
the bleed valve.
Tachometer box
It operates a relay controlled by a speed signal from the N1
tachometer transmitter.
Control electro-valve
It admits P2 air to close the valve when it is electrically supplied.
Opening
When the N1 decreases below 94%, the tachometer box opens
the electrical contact and the spring moves the electro-valve to
the closed position. The spring pushes the piston which opens
the bleed valve.
Bleed valve
It includes a spring loaded piston subjected to P2 pressure.
The piston operates the valve.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.10
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC TYPE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TACHOMETER BOX
BLEED VALVE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
P2
+
P1'
N1
96%
P2 AIR
SUPPLY
94%
GRILL ON P1'
AIR DISCHARGE
CONTROL
ELECTRO-VALVE
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC TYPE
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.11
AIR SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE
The compressor bleed valve includes 3 main parts: the detection
capsule, the intermediate stage and the bleed valve.
Operation
Closing
Detection capsule
When the gas generator rotation speed N1 increases, the
compression ratio P2/P0 increases and beyond a certain value:
It is subjected to P2/P0 pressure ratio and controls the air leak
downstream of the calibrated orifice B.
- The pressure becomes sufficient to distort the detection
capsule which closes the leak
It is fitted with a filter at the inlet.
- The pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice B increases
Intermediate stage
- The diaphragm of the intermediate stage closes the leak
It includes a diaphragm which is subjected to the pressure
downstream of B. The diaphragm controls the leak which
determines the pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice A.
- The pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice A increases
- The piston moves down under P2 pressure and the valve
closes and stops the P1' air discharge.
Bleed valve
Opening
It includes a spring loaded piston subjected to a downstream
pressure. The piston opens or closes the P1' air passage.
The P2/P0 ratio is not sufficient to distort the capsule and there
are air leaks downstream of the calibrated orifices. The piston
is not actuated and the valve is open.
It also includes a microswitch, operated by the piston, which
provides indication of the bleed valve position.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
A certain amount of air, tapped from the centrifugal compressor
inlet, is discharged overboard.
Edition: May 2014
5.12
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PNEUMATIC TYPE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
BLEED
VALVE
INTERMEDIATE
STAGE
DETECTION
CAPSULE
FILTER
P2
A
INTERMEDIATE
STAGE
B
DETECTION
CAPSULE
FILTER
P0
P1'
P1'
MICROSWITCH
INDICATOR
BLEED
VALVE
PNEUMATIC TYPE
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.13
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE
Operation
Description
Closing
The compressor bleed valve includes 3 main parts: the detection
capsule, the intermediate stage and the bleed valve.
When the gas generator rotation speed N1 increases, the
compression ratio P2/P0 increases and beyond a certain value:
Detection capsule
- The pressure becomes sufficient to deform the detection
capsule which closes the leak
It is subjected to P2/P0 pressure ratio and controls the air leak
downstream of the calibrated orifice B.
- The pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice B increases
It is fitted with a filter at the inlet.
- The diaphragm of the intermediate stage closes the leak
Intermediate stage
- The pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice A increases
It includes a diaphragm which is subjected to the pressure
downstream of B. The diaphragm controls the leak which
determines the pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice A.
- The piston moves down under P2 pressure and rotates the
butterfly valve through the rack and pinion mechanism. The
valve closes and stops the air discharge.
Bleed valve
Opening
It includes a spring loaded piston subjected to pressure
downstream of orifice A. The piston actuates the butterfly valve
by means of a rack and pinion mechanism.
The P2/P0 ratio is not sufficient to distort the capsule and there
are air leaks downstream of the calibrated orifices. The piston
is not actuated and the butterfly valve is open.
It also includes a microswitch, operated by the piston, which
gives the position of the bleed valve by means of a light ("on"
valve "open").
A certain amount of air, tapped from the centrifugal compressor
inlet, is discharged overboard.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.14
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PNEUMATIC BUTTERFLY TYPE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
P2 AIR
BUTTERFLY
VALVE
A
FILTER
B
FILTER
PISTON
P0 AIR
P2 air
MICROSWITCH
DETECTION
CAPSULE
INTERMEDIATE
STAGE
P1’
P1’
BUTTERFLY
VALVE
PINION
RACK
PNEUMATIC BUTTERFLY TYPE
COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.15
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MICROSWITCH
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
EXTERNAL AIR PIPES
The external air pipes carry air to and from the various
components of the air system.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
Main characteristics
- Type of pipes: rigid, stainless steel
- Type of unions: QUINSON unions.
Description
The external air pipes connect the air tappings to the following
components:
- Compressor bleed valve
- FCU metering unit
- Start valves assembly
- Power turbine labyrinth seal.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.16
AIR SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TO COMPRESSOR
BLEED VALVE
TO FCU METERING UNIT
TO POWER TURBINE
LABYRINTH SEAL
(except 1E2-1S)
TO POWER TURBINE
LABYRINTH SEAL
(1E2-1S)
TO START
VALVES ASSEMBLY
Type of pipes:
Rigid, stainless steel
Type of unions:
QUINSON unions
EXTERNAL AIR PIPES
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.17
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
AIR SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Scheduled inspections
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.18
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 150 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Pre TU231:
- Inspection and cleaning of
P2 union/Free Turbine
Test of the opening and closing thresholds
of the bleed valve
INSPECTION AT 1,000 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection of the bleed valve filter
Chap. 75
Chap. 75
Chap. 75
INSPECTION AT 300 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection and check of the turbine
casing drain valve assy
Inspection of the bleed valve
Chap. 72
Chap. 75
INSPECTION AT 600 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Post TU231:
- Inspection and cleaning of
P2 union/Free Turbine
Chap. 75
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
AIR SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
5.19
AIR SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
6 - FUEL SYSTEM
- Fuel system - Presentation .................................................................. 6.2
- Fuel Control Unit ................................................................................... 6.8
- Pressurising, stop purge and overspeed valves ............................... 6.18
- Start valves assembly .......................................................................... 6.20
- Start injectors ........................................................................................ 6.22
- Main injection system ........................................................................... 6.24
- Combustion chamber drain valve ....................................................... 6.26
- Fuel system - Operation ....................................................................... 6.28
- External fuel pipes ................................................................................ 6.32
- Fuel system - 1st line maintenance ..................................................... 6.34 - 6.37
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.1
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
Main components
Function
The fuel system supplies, distributes, controls, meters and
injects the fuel.
- Fuel Control Unit
• Fuel pump
• Fuel filter
• Metering unit
Position
- Pressurising, stop purge and overspeed valves
All the system components are located on the engine, except
for the tachometer box (twin-engine configuration).
- Start valves assembly
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
- Fuel injection system.
Main characteristics
- Supply by the airframe system and the engine pump
- Centrifugal main injection and start injection by injectors
- Manual control
- Fuel control: hydromechanical controlling and metering device.
Note: For tables indicating the types of fuel which can be
used and the corresponding US, UK, NATO and French
specifications, refer to Maintenance Manual chapter 71.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.2
FUEL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
DISTRIBUTION
FUEL
SUPPLY
CONTROL
Supply:
By the airframe system and
the engine pump
INJECTION
Centrifugal main injection
and start injection by
injectors
METERING
Manual control
TACHOMETER
BOX
(according to version)
START VALVES
ASSEMBLY
METERING
UNIT
P2
MANUAL
CONTROL
TANK
Booster pump
(according to
version)
Airframe
Fuel control:
Hydromechanical controlling
and metering device
PRESSURISING,
STOP PURGE AND
OVERSPEED VALVES
FUEL
FILTER
FUEL INJECTION
SYSTEM
FUEL
PUMP
N1
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT
Engine
GENERAL
FUEL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.3
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
SUPPLY
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
LOW PRESSURE FUEL SYSTEM (1E, 1S)
Functional description
Function
The ejector is supplied with fuel from the HP pump via the astatic
valve which opens at a given pressure. The ejector ensures a
supply of fuel to the HP pump inlet.
This system is designed for aircraft without a booster pump and
assures the supply to the HP pump.
Position
All the components are fitted on a bracket on the underside of
the protection tube.
A connection between the two engines permits priming of one
engine by the other. Priming can also be carried out using a
hand pump.
Main components
- LP filter (with a by-pass valve, a pre-blockage indicator or
pre-blockage pressure switch according to version)
- Min. pressure switch
- Pressure transmitter (optional)
- Manual valve
- Ejector
- Astatic valve
- Pre-blockage indicator
- Jet.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.4
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FUEL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
ASTATIC
VALVE
PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
(pre-blockage pressure
switch in 1E version)
PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
(optional)
To HP pump
(FCU)
MIN PRESSURE
SWITCH
LP
FILTER
HP pump
pressure
(FCU)
Priming supply
to other engine
(1S version)
EJECTOR
FILTER
Fuel suction
from tank
MANUAL
VALVE
HP pump pressure
(FCU)
To HP pump
(FCU)
Fuel suction
from tank
EJECTOR
ASTATIC
VALVE
MANUAL
VALVE
MIN PRESSURE
SWITCH
BY-PASS
VALVE
To LP
filter
Fuel suction
from tank
JET
EJECTOR
LOW PRESSURE FUEL SYSTEM (1E, 1S)
FUEL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.5
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
BY-PASS
VALVE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
Valves
Fuel pump
- Non-return valve
Gear type pump, mechanically driven by the accessory gearbox
and fitted with a pressure-relief valve.
- Pressurising valve
Filter
- Start electro-valve
The filter has a pre-blockage indicator (according to version)
and a by-pass valve.
- Start purge valve
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
DESCRIPTION
- Stop purge valve
- Overspeed electro-valve.
Main and manual valves
The main and manual valves are controlled by the control lever
which acts at the same time on the acceleration control unit cam.
Injection system
- Start injectors (x 2)
- Centrifugal injection wheel.
Metering unit
The hydromechanical controller acts on the metering needle
(see next chapter).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.6
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Pre-blockage
indicator
START
ELECTRO-VALVE
Pressure-relief
valve
FILTER
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FUEL
PUMP
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
START
INJECTORS
Filter by-pass
valve
START
PURGE VALVE
MANUAL
VALVE
MAIN
VALVE
CONTROL
LEVER
Cam
METERING
UNIT
STOP
PURGE VALVE
NON-RETURN
VALVE
PRESSURISING
VALVE
INJECTION
WHEEL
OVERSPEED
ELECTRO-VALVE
DESCRIPTION
FUEL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.7
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
Main components
Function
- Fuel pump
The Fuel Control Unit (FCU) ensures fuel supply and fuel flow
metering.
- Filter (position according to version)
Position
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
- Pre-blockage indicator (1E, 1K, 1S versions only)
- On the left front face of the accessory gearbox.
- Manual control
• Valves and cam
• Anticipator
Main characteristics
- Metering unit.
- Type: hydro-mechanical
- Mounting: clamp
- Replaceable components:
• Filter
• Pre-blockage indicator (according to version).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.8
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
VALVE SHAFT
CAM
PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
(1E, 1K, 1S
versions only)
Type:
Hydro-mechanical
Mounting:
Clamp
Replacable components:
• Filter
• Pre-blockage indicator
(according to version)
ANTICIPATOR
FILTER
(position according
to version)
GENERAL
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.9
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL PUMP
Pressure-reducing valve
Function
This is a diaphragm valve which provides a constant pressure
output of approx. 400 kPa (58 PSI) for the hydraulic supply of
the hydromechanical governor.
The pump assembly supplies fuel under determined conditions
of pressure and flow.
Main characteristics
Operation
Fuel pump
- Type: spur gears
- Rotation speed: proportional to N1 speed.
The pump receives fuel from the aircraft LP system. The fuel
is drawn in by the pump, it passes between the gears and the
casing and is forced out under pressure.
Description
Pressure-relief valve
- Pressure-relief valve setting: 3300 kPa (478.5 PSI)
The assembly comprises the pressure pump and the pressurerelief valve.
Fuel pump
If the pump outlet pressure exceeds a given value, the pressure
relief valve will open and allow fuel to return to the pump inlet
thus limiting the maximum pressure in the system.
It is a spur-gear pump which has a drive gear and a driven
gear, the drive gear being driven by the accessory drive via
the pump drive shaft which is a quill shaft. The shaft is sealed
by two lip seals, with a drain between them which prevent fuel
from entering the accessory gearbox.
Pressure-reducing valve
The pump is supplied with fuel from the aircraft system.
When pump outlet pressure increases the diaphragm moves
up, reducing the valve opening and thus maintaining a constant
downstream pressure.
Pressure-relief valve
It is a conical valve held closed by a spring during normal
operation.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
The diaphragm is subjected to fuel pressure on one side
opposed by spring pressure on the other side. The position of
the diaphragm determines the position of the valve.
Edition: May 2014
6.10
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Type:
Spur gears
PUMP
Pressure-relief valve
setting:
3300 kPa (478.5 PSI)
Rotation speed:
Proportional to
N1 speed
DRIVEN
GEAR
PRESSURE-RELIEF VALVE
SEALS
PUMP
CIRCLIP
PRESSURERELIEF VALVE
DOUBLE
SEALING
RING
PRESSUREREDUCING
VALVE
DRIVE
GEAR
DRAIN
FUEL PUMP
(BEFORE TU 367)
SHAFT
SPACER
SEALING
RING
FUEL PUMP
(AFTER TU 367)
FUEL PUMP
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.11
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PRESSURERELIEF VALVE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
- 1E, 1K and 1S: The visual pre-blockage indicator.
Function
The filter retains any particles that may be in the fuel in order
to protect the metering unit components.
Position
This is a differential visual indicator. It includes a red indicator
which pops out in a transparent cover when the pressure
difference across the filtering element exceeds a given
value. Two O-ring seals which ensure the sealing between
the indicator and the FCU body and between the upstream
pressure inlet and the downstream pressure inlet.
Operation
- In the system: between the pump and the metering unit
Normal operation
- On the engine: lower part of FCU.
The fuel from the pump enters the fuel filter and flows through
the filtering element (from outside to inside).
Main characteristics
- Type: metal cartridge
The filtering element retains particles larger than 20 microns.
The fuel then flows to the metering unit.
- Filtering ability: 20 microns
Pre-blockage
- By-pass valve setting: ∆P 200 kPa (39 PSID)
When the filter becomes dirty, the pressure difference across
the filtering element increases.
- Visual pre-blockage indicator setting: ∆P 150 kPa
(21.75 PSID).
If the pressure difference becomes higher than the visual preblockage indicator setting, the red visual indicator pops out.
Description
Note: The visual pre-blockage indicator can be reset by
removing the cover and pushing in the indicator.
The assembly comprises:
Blockage
- The filtering element: O-ring seals ensure the sealing
between the cartridge and the filter housing
When the pressure difference across the filtering element
exceeds the by-pass valve setting, the by-pass valve opens
and causes the fuel flow to by-pass the filter.
- The by-pass valve
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.12
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FUEL FILTER - VISUAL PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR (1E, 1K, 1S)
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
CUP
FILTERING
CARTRIDGE
FILTER
BASE
FUEL
FILTER
PRE-BLOKAGE
INDICATOR
FUEL
FILTER
BY-PASS
VALVE
BY-PASS
VALVE
RED
INDICATOR
NORMAL OPERATION
FILTER
BLOCKAGE
ONSET
FILTER
VISUAL PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PIN
INDICATOR OPERATION
(THE RED VISUAL
INDICATOR APPEARS)
TRANSPARENT
COVER
Type:
Metal cartridge
PRE-BLOCKAGE
Filtering ability:
20 microns
Upstream
pressure
FILTER
BLOCKAGE
OPENING OF
BY-PASS VALVE
By-pass valve setting:
∆P 200 kPa (39 PSID)
Visual pre-blockage
indicator setting:
∆P 150 kPa (21.75 PSID)
Downstream pressure
1E, 1K AND 1S:
VISUAL PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
BLOCKAGE
FUEL FILTER - VISUAL PRE-BLOCKAGE INDICATOR (1E, 1K, 1S)
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.13
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
Operation
Function
Stop position
A mechanical control linked to the fuel control unit permits
starting control, acceleration to nominal speed and stopping.
It can also be used as a manual fuel flow control in the event
of automatic control failure.
The collective pitch lever inputs signals to the anticipator during
flight.
Start and acceleration range
- position b : progressive opening of the main valve; the cam
frees the metering needle above a certain angle.
Note: There is a start pre-selection position at 20° for the 1E2
version.
Position
- Interface on the left side of the FCU.
Flight position
Description
- position c : the main valve is fully open.
The manual control includes the following devices:
"Manual control +" range
- The main valve which permits acceleration control during the
start phase and the use of the "manual control -" range
- The manual valve which is used for the "manual control +"
range
- The acceleration control cam which controls the position of
the metering needle for starting.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
- position a : the two valves are closed, the cam maintains
the metering needle closed.
- position d : progressive opening of the manual valve, the
main valve remaining open.
"Manual control -" range
In case of automatic control failure supplying too much fuel
to the engine, the control lever can be placed in the start and
acceleration range b to reduce the fuel flow.
Edition: May 2014
6.14
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MANUAL CONTROL
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
0 to 5°
STOP
POSITION
CAM CONTROL
LEVER
CONTROL
LEVER
CAM
MANUAL
VALVE
c
b
1E2:
20°
ACCELERATION
CONTROL CAM
5°
52°
45°
90
27°
IDLE
POSITION
CONTROL
LEVER
52°
FLIGHT
POSITION
62°
°
a
METERING
UNIT
Fully
closed
Fully
closed
Fully closed
by the cam
Partially
open
Fully
closed
Partially opened
by the cam
Partially
open
Fully
closed
Partially opened
by the cam
Fully
open
Fully
closed
Controlled by the
automatic control sytem
through the working piston
Fully
open
Partially
open
Fuel flow controlled
manually through
the manual valve
1E2:
20° START
POSITION
ANTICIPATOR
MAIN
VALVE
MANUAL
VALVE
d
Flight position
P2
Note: In the acceleration phase from 27° to 52°, the main
valve is progressively opened manually (the cam does
not actuate the needle above approx. 35°)
62° to 90°
MANUAL "+"
RANGE
MANUAL CONTROL
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.15
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
VALVE
SHAFT
MAIN
VALVE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
Main components
Function
- Constant ∆P valve
This constantly meters of the fuel injected into the combustion
chamber.
- Metering needle.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
METERING UNIT
Position
- In the system: downstream of the pump
- On the engine: in the FCU.
Main characteristics
- Profiled needle which moves in a calibrated orifice.
- The metering needle is controlled by the control system.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.16
FUEL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONSTANT ∆P
VALVE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Profiled needle which moves
in a calibrated orifice
The metering needle is
controlled by the control system
METERING NEEDLE
(controlled by the
control system)
METERING UNIT
FUEL CONTROL UNIT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.17
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Engine running
Function
The pressurising valve ensures that priority of fuel flow is given
to the start injectors during starting.
The stop purge valve controls the fuel supply to the injection
wheel:
- Fuel supply during starting and in operation
- Fuel shut-off and draining of the injection wheel during shutdown.
It is associated with an electro-valve for a rapid engine shutdown in the event of power turbine overspeed (only on twinengine aircraft).
Position
- Lower left side of the combustion chamber casing.
Main characteristics
Pressurising valve setting: 180 kPa (26.1 PSI).
Main components
As soon as the fuel pressure is sufficient to open the pressurising
valve, the pressure is admitted under the diaphragm which
causes the closing of the purge valve and the opening of the
fuel supply valve. The fuel flows to the injection wheel and is
sprayed into the combustion chamber.
During shut-down
The normal stop selection (closing of the main valve by the
control lever) results in a decrease of injection pressure. The
pressurising valve closes, the pressure decreases below the
diaphragm which causes the supply valve to close (as the direct
pump pressure increases) and the purge valve to open: draining
of fuel to prevent blockage of the distributor by carbonization of
the remaining fuel. The fuel is returned to the tank (post TU 262).
When the engine is completely stopped, the purge valve closes
under the force of its spring (see detail).
Overspeed shut-down (twin-engine
configuration)
Engine shut-down can also be commanded by the electro-valve
which, when opened, causes the pressure to decrease below
the diaphragm and the valve to move down (shut-down in case
of power turbine overspeed; only in twin-engine configuration).
- Pressurising valve
- Stop purge valve (dual valve)
- Overspeed electro-valve.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.18
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PRESSURISING, STOP PURGE AND
OVERSPEED VALVES
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
STOP PURGE
VALVE
Pressurising
valve setting:
180 kPa (26.10 PSI)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
PRESSURISING
VALVE
OVERSPEED
ELECTRO-VALVE
(only on twin-engine
version)
Pump
direct
pressure
To the tank
(post TU 262)
ENGINE RUNNING
DURING SHUT-DOWN
PRESSURISING, STOP PURGE AND OVERSPEED VALVES
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.19
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Operation
The start valves assembly ensures the fuel distribution to the
two injectors during engine starting and their purge at the end
of start.
Purge before start
Position
Upper part of the combustion chamber casing.
Fuel injection
Main characteristics
- Re-injection prohibit pressure switch setting: approx. 52%
N1
- Start purge valve setting:
• opening at 5 kPa (0.725 PSI)
When starting is selected, the fuel pump pressure increases
rapidly and closes the purge valve, the electro-valve is energised
open and the fuel supplied by the engine pump flows to the
2 injectors which spray it into the combustion chamber. The
fuel is then ignited by the sparks of the igniter plugs.
Ventilation of the start injectors
• closing at 120 kPa (17.4 PSI).
Description
- Start electro-valve
- P2 ball valve
- Re-injection prohibit pressure switch
- Start purge valve (with cover and a support drain, according
to versions).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
During the initial phase of starting, the fuel supplied from the
aircraft system flows into the FCU, through the non-return valve
to the start purge valve which opens and returns the fuel to the
tank. The purpose of this phase is to expel any air which may
be in the system.
At the end of starting, the supply to the electro-valve is cut and
the valve closes. The air under compressor pressure P2 (which
has increased in the meantime) lifts the ball of the valve and
flows to ventilate the injectors. This ventilation continues as long
as the engine operates to prevent blockage of the injectors by
carbonization of the remaining fuel. The P2 pressure actuates the
pressure switch to prevent any re-injection which could cause a
flame-out by suddenly reducing fuel flow to the injection wheel.
Edition: May 2014
6.20
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
START VALVES ASSEMBLY
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
P2
BALL VALVE
START ELECTRO-VALVE
AND RE-INJECTION
PROHIBIT PRESSURE SWITCH
COVER
FUEL OUTLET
TO INJECTORS
P2
FUEL
INLET
Pump
pressure
PURGE BEFORE START
FUEL INJECTION
Pump
pressure
VENTILATION
OF THE START INJECTORS
START VALVES ASSEMBLY
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
PURGE
TO TANK
PUMP
PRESSURE
Re-injection prohibit
pressure switch setting:
Approx. 52% N1
Start purge valve setting:
• opening at 5 kPa (0.725 PSI)
• closing at 120 kPa (17.4 PSI)
6.21
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
START PURGE VALVE
(with drain, according
to versions)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Operation
The two start injectors spray fuel into the combustion chamber
during engine starting.
Starting
Position
The fuel is atomised and is ignited by the sparks from the igniter
plugs. The flame thus produced, ignites the fuel sprayed by the
centrifugal injection wheel.
- On the upper part of the turbine casing at 2 o'clock and
10 o'clock
- They penetrate into the mixer unit.
During starting the injectors are supplied with fuel.
Normal running
When the engine reaches self sustaining speed (approx.
45% N1) the fuel supply to the injectors is shut off.
Main characteristics
P2 air is then blown through the injectors to avoid carbonisation
of the residual fuel.
- Type: simple injector
- Quantity: 2
It should be noted that ventilation is continuous during engine
running.
- Ventilation: by P2 airflow.
Description
The injectors are mounted on the upper part of the turbine
casing. They penetrate into the combustion chamber through
holes in the mixer unit.
They are secured by bolts onto bosses with seals and spacers
to prevent leaks and adjust the depth of penetration into the
combustion chamber.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.22
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
START INJECTORS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Type:
Simple injector
START
INJECTOR
SUPPLY
Quantity:
2
Ventilation:
By P2 airflow
START
INJECTOR
SPACERS AND
SEALS
SHROUD
NUT
Fuel
inlet
START
INJECTOR
IGNITER
PLUG
STARTING
START
INJECTOR
VENTILATION
FILTER
MANIFOLD
P2
JET
Airflow
direction
NORMAL RUNNING
START INJECTORS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.23
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAIN INJECTION SYSTEM
Centrifugal injection assembly
The injection system sprays fuel into the combustion chamber
to give stable and efficient combustion.
Position
- On the engine: inside the combustion chamber. The injection
wheel is mounted between the centrifugal compressor and
the turbine shaft. The distributor is bolted to the diffuser
backplate.
Operation
The fuel is delivered to the distributor by the internal supply pipe.
Main characteristics
It passes through the distributor's axial holes into the chamber
in the injection wheel.
- Type: centrifugal injection
As the centrifugal injection wheel is rotating at high speed (N1)
the fuel is centrifuged out through the radial holes and is sprayed
between the two swirl plates.
- Radial fuel supply.
Description
Combustion chamber fuel inlet union
Fitted at the lower right front face of the compressor casing, it
has a plug to test the sealing of the union.
Internal supply pipe
This pipe connects the inlet union to the fuel distributor. It is
fitted between the front swirl plate and the diffuser back-plate.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
This assembly consists of a stationary distributor and a wheel.
The distributor, fitted onto the diffuser back-plate, is drilled with
axial holes which deliver the fuel to the wheel. The injection
wheel, mounted by curvic-couplings between the compressor
and the turbine shaft, is drilled with radial holes which form the
fuel spraying jets. Sealing between the distributor and the wheel
is achieved by pressurised labyrinth seals.
It should be noted that the injection pressure is supplied by the
centrifugal force and therefore the fuel system does not require
very high pressures.
The centrifugal injection wheel fuel chamber is sealed by
pressurised labyrinth seals. There is a small air flow into the fuel
chamber. During shut-down, the fuel remaining in the system
is purged via the stop purge valve.
Edition: May 2014
6.24
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER FUEL
INLET UNION
Type:
Centrifugal injection
FUEL SPRAYING
INTO THE
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER
CENTRIFUGAL
INJECTION
WHEEL
Radial fuel supply
DISTRIBUTOR
INTERNAL
SUPPLY PIPE
DISTRIBUTOR
CENTRIFUGAL
INJECTION WHEEL
(with spraying jets)
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER FUEL
INLET UNION
Fuel inlet
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER FUEL
INLET UNION
SUPPLY PIPE
LEAK CHECK
PLUG
MAIN INJECTION SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.25
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Operation
The valve drains overboard any unburnt fuel remaining in the
combustion chamber.
The valve has two positions: open and closed.
Position
- On the engine: screwed into the turbine casing lower part.
Open position
When the engine is not running and at the beginning of start,
the valve is held open by the action of the tension spring.
- Type: half-ball valve
Any unburnt fuel in the combustion chamber will drain through
the valve overboard to the drain system. This ensures that no
fuel accumulates in the combustion chamber which could cause
starting problems (e.g. overtemperature).
- Setting: closing obtained at about 40% N1.
Closed position
Description
As the engine starts the combustion chamber pressure increases.
This pressure is felt on the upper surface of the half ball which
moves down to close the drain.
Main characteristics
The drain valve includes the following components:
- A threaded part to fix the valve on the combustion chamber
The valve closes during the initial phase of starting for a speed
of about 40% N1.
- A half-ball valve mounted on a tension spring
- An outlet union which connects to the drain system
- A circlip which retains the valve in the body.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.26
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
COMBUSTION CHAMBER DRAIN VALVE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Setting:
Closing obtained at
about approx. 40% N1
Unburnt fuel
P2 air pressure
CIRCLIP
SPRING
THREADED
PART
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER DRAIN
VALVE
HALF-BALL
VALVE
OUTLET
UNION
To drain system
"OPEN" position
COMBUSTION CHAMBER DRAIN VALVE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
"CLOSED" position
6.27
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Type:
Half-ball valve
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
PRE-START - FUEL SYSTEM AIR PURGE STARTING
Starting
Pre-start
When engine start is selected, the start accessories are
electrically supplied.
- The pump is not operating and there is no pressure in the
system
- The main and manual valves are closed
- The constant ∆P valve is closed
- The metering needle is closed by the acceleration control
cam
- The following valves are closed:
• non-return valve
• pressurising valve
• start purge valve
The constant ∆P valve operates and returns the excess fuel
to the pump inlet.
The fuel flow is controlled by the movement of the control lever.
At 45% N1, the start accessories are de-energised by releasing
the start button and the start injectors are ventilated by P2 air
pressure.
At 52% N1, P2 pressure opens the reinjection prohibit pressure
switch to avoid an accidental fuel re-injection, which could cause
engine flame-out.
- The stop purge valve is in its injection position
- The start electro-valve is closed.
Fuel system air purge
During the initial phase of starting, the fuel supplied from the
airframe system flows into the FCU, through the non-return
valve and to the start purge valve which opens and returns the
fuel to the tank. The purpose of this phase is to expel any air
which may be in the system.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
The pump is driven and supplies the start injectors, due to the
priority given by the pressurising valve, then the centrifugal
injection wheel.
The control lever is moved to the flight position, progressively
opening the main valve to accelerate the engine until the
hydromechanical control takes over.
Edition: May 2014
6.28
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FUEL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
P2
P2
STARTING
45% < N1 < 52%
P2
FUEL SYSTEM AIR PURGE
STARTING N1 < 45%
STARTING
N1 > 52%
PRE-START - FUEL SYSTEM AIR PURGE - STARTING
FUEL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.29
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
NORMAL RUNNING - MANUAL CONTROL - ENGINE
SHUT-DOWN
Normal running
The required fuel flow is metered by the metering needle. The
metering needle position is determined by the hydromechanical
control system.
The fuel pump always supplies more fuel than the engine
requires. The excess fuel returns to the pump inlet through the
constant ∆P valve.
The start injectors are continuously ventilated by P2 air
circulation.
Manual control
The manual control is used for starting and stopping the engine.
It can also be used in case of a control system failure.
Engine shut-down
The lever is pulled fully rearward, closing the main valve which
cuts the fuel flow to the engine, causing it to run down and stop.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.30
FUEL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
P2
P2
-
P2
+
Flight
position
NORMAL RUNNING
P2
MANUAL CONTROL
ENGINE SHUT-DOWN
When the engine is completely stopped,
the dual valve closes the drain under
action of the spring
NORMAL RUNNING - MANUAL CONTROL - ENGINE SHUT-DOWN
FUEL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.31
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
EXTERNAL FUEL PIPES
The external fuel pipes carry the fuel to and from the various
components of the fuel system.
Note: The routing of the pipes may be different according to
version.
Main characteristics
- Type of pipes: rigid, stainless steel
- Type of unions: standard (connecting flange with bolts).
Description
The external fuel pipes connect the various components as
follows:
- Fuel pump → Stop purge valve
- FCU → Pressurising valve
- Pressurising valve → Start electro-valve
- Start electro-valve → Start injectors (2 pipes)
- Start purge valve → Stop purge valve
- Start purge valve → Fuel tank
- Stop purge valve → Combustion chamber fuel inlet union
- Pre TU262: Stop purge valve → Drain
- Post TU262: Stop purge valve → Fuel tank.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.32
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
START ELECTRO-VALVE /
LEFT START INJECTOR
PRESSURISING VALVE /
START ELECTRO-VALVE
P2
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
START PURGE VALVE /
STOP PURGE VALVE
P2
FUEL PUMP /
STOP PURGE VALVE
START ELECTRO-VALVE /
RIGHT START INJECTOR
FCU /
PRESSURISING
VALVE
STOP PURGE
VALVE / COMBUSTION
CHAMBER FUEL
INLET UNION
START PURGE VALVE /
FUEL TANK
STOP PURGE VALVE /
FUEL TANK
(post TU262)
STOP PURGE VALVE / DRAIN
(pre TU262)
EXTERNAL FUEL PIPES
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.33
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (1)
Scheduled inspections
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.34
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 100 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
- Leak test of the deceleration control unit
Note: During a ground run
INSPECTION AT 300 FLIGHT HOURS
Chap. 73
INSPECTION AT 200 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Pre TU183:
- Do a check of the FCU characteristics
Chap. 73
Note: This check is to be carried out systematically
in case of NR drift. The anticipator adjustment
is prohibited if this check has not been
carried pout.
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection of the start injectors
Inspection and check of the ignition
solenoid valve
Inspection and check of the starting drain
valve assy
Inspection and check of the drain valve
of the injection manifold
Inspection and check of the pressurizing
valve
Inspection and check of the
Fuel Control Unit
Check of the FCU controls travel and of the
immobilization of pins
Note: Engine installed on helicopter
Inspection and check of the starting
drain valve for leaks (manual valve)
Note: During a ground run
Inspection and check of the re-injection
prohibit switch of the ignition solenoid
valve (engine running)
Note: During a ground run
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Chap. 72
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (1)
FUEL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.35
FUEL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (2)
Scheduled inspections
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.36
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 500 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Post TU183:
- Do a check of the FCU characteristics
Chap. 72
Note: This check is to be carried out systematically in
case of NR drift. The anticipator adjustment is
prohibited if this check has not been carried out
INSPECTION AT 750 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
- Permeability check of the injection
manifold
Chap. 72
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (2)
FUEL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
6.37
FUEL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
7 - CONTROL SYSTEM
- Control system - Presentation ............................................................ 7.2
- Control system - Operation .................................................................. 7.6
- Control system - 1st line maintenance ............................................... 7.30 - 7.31
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.1
CONTROL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
Main components
Function
- Fuel Control Unit (FCU)
The control system is designed to adapt the engine to the aircraft's
power requirements, whilst remaining within defined limits.
- Engine (engine and engine systems)
The main functions are:
- Manual control
- Airframe (various systems: control, monitoring and indication)
- Tachometer box (according to version).
- Speed control
- Various limits
- Acceleration control
- Overspeed detection.
Main characteristics
- Hydromechanical control
- Manual control.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.2
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Hydromechanical
control
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
Manual control
AIRFRAME
(various systems)
TEST
MAIN FUNCTIONS
- Manual control
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT
TACHOMETER BOX
(according to version)
- Speed control
- Various limits
- Acceleration control
- Overspeed detection
ENGINE
(engine and engine systems)
GENERAL
CONTROL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.3
CONTROL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
The complete system includes airframe components, engine
components and the FCU.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
DESCRIPTION
Airframe components
- Control components (control lever and anticipator)
- Monitoring components (indications, warning lights, etc.)
Engine components
- Hydromechanical components:
• Stop purge valve
• Start purge valve
• Start electro-valve
• Pressurising valve
• Start injectors
• Main injection system
- FCU components:
• Power turbine speed governor
• Gas generator speed governor
• Acceleration control unit
• Metering unit
• Deceleration control unit.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.4
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
START
ELECTRO-VALVE
START
INJECTORS
POWER TURBINE
SPEED GOVERNOR
START
PURGE
VALVE
CONTROL
LEVER
GAS GENERATOR
SPEED GOVERNOR
STOP PURGE
VALVE
ACCELERATION
CONTROL UNIT
METERING
UNIT
DECELERATION
CONTROL UNIT
PRESSURISING
VALVE
INJECTION
WHEEL
DESCRIPTION
CONTROL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.5
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ANTICIPATOR
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Adaptation to requirements
Installation configuration
The gas generator supplies power to the power turbine which
is connected to the helicopter main rotor.
Installation requirements
- Aircraft rotor speed (NR) almost constant in all operating
conditions (because of the rotor efficiency) whatever the load
applied
- Max. torque limitation (imposed by the mechanical transmission
and the helicopter main gearbox)
- Power turbine rotation speed (N2) within given limits (in fact
almost constant, as it is connected to the rotor)
The control system ensures the engine adaptation to the
requirements by metering the fuel flow WF sprayed into the
combustion chamber.
Thus, the gas generator adapts automatically to the requirements
(N1 demand) to maintain constant power turbine rotation speed
N2 whilst keeping all the other parameters within determined
limits.
This adaptation is illustrated by:
- The diagram W/N2 which illustrates the power W, the max.
torque TRQ and the rotation speeds N1 and N2
- The diagram N1/N2 which illustrates the N1/N2
relationship.
- Limitation of the gas generator rotation speed N1:
• Max. N1 (maximum engine power)
• Min. N1 (to avoid critical speeds)
- Load sharing (equal sharing of loads between the 2 engines)
- Protection against surge, flame-out, overtemperature…
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.6
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CONTROL
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
NR
N2
Q
W
Ma
TRQ
qu
or
t
x.
Max. N1
R
eT
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
N1
W
N1
isospeeds
TET
Min. N1
WF
Control
system
N2
POWER W / N1, N2
N1
REQUIREMENTS
Max.
- NR
- N2
- Max. torque TRQ
- N1
- W eng 1 = W eng 2
- Protections
Nominal N2
Operating
range
Min.
INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION
AND REQUIREMENTS
N1 / N2
N2
ADAPTATION TO REQUIREMENTS
CONTROL
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.7
CONTROL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Compensation
Static droop
Each governor (N2 and N1) uses the principle of the centrifugal
governor (a system invented by James Watt), in which a control
spring is set in opposition to a flyweight. The spring attempts
to open the metering valve and is opposed by the centrifugal
force generated by the flyweight.
At a stabilised rating, the system is in equilibrium: the force
exerted by the spring is equal to the centrifugal force (Fs = Fc).
There is therefore a given fuel flow and a nominal rating.
In a transient rating, e.g. when the engine rpm decreases (due
to the increase in the resisting torque), the centrifugal force
decreases. The force exerted by the spring therefore becomes
the greater of the two and opens the metering valve. This
increases the engine rpm until the equilibrium is re-established
(Fs = Fc). Although the equilibrium has been re-established, the
spring is now less compressed than at the previous engine rpm.
It therefore exerts less force, which leads to a slight reduction
in the nominal engine rpm.
In this type of control system, the N1 speed is made to be
inversely proportional to the N2. The relationship between N1
and N2 illustrates this proportionality and the variation in N2 is
referred to as "static droop".
As the largest load variations are caused by changes in
collective pitch, a link between the collective pitch lever and the
governor allows the system to compensate for the static droop.
In addition, the detection phase is brought forward (hence the
name "anticipator") to reduce the response time. To do this, a
cam is added to compress the spring so that it exerts the same
force in all collective pitch positions.
The diagram shows the apparent static-droop line for different
collective pitch positions (anticipator effect):
In the diagram: θ1 = fine pitch, θ2 = medium pitch,
θ3 = coarse pitch.
In operation, points 1, 2 and 3 are obtained and the static droop
is therefore compensated for, i.e. the power turbine speed and
therefore the rotor speed are almost constant in all operating
conditions.
In transient ratings, the power turbine speed varies, but the
governor acts to bring it very quickly back to its nominal value,
to within the value of the static droop.
Note: The static droop is slightly overcompensated.
Although the "static droop" ensures the stability of the system,
it is not acceptable because the helicopter rotor requires one
constant rotation speed.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.8
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
STATIC DROOP - COMPENSATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
L1
L2
WF/N1
L1
L1
WF/N1
3
2
θ3
1
θ2
θ1
Static droop
N2
N2
STATIC DROOP - COMPENSATION
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.9
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
The system meters the fuel flow in order to match the engine
power to the requirements thus keeping power turbine rotation
speed constant. The control components are contained in the
hydromechanical unit mounted on the front face of the accessory
gearbox.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PRINCIPLE OF THE CONTROL LOOP
Operation of the control loop
The power turbine governor compares the actual speed N2
with a speed datum which varies with the collective pitch. It
determines a speed datum (N1*) which is a function of the
difference measured.
The gas generator governor compares the datum speed (N1*)
and the actual speed (N1) and meters the fuel to maintain the
datum speed, thus matching the gas generator to the conditions.
The acceleration control unit limits the transient fuel flow (WF)
variations in relation to P2 pressure so as to prevent compressor
surge while permitting quick response times.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.10
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
POWER
TURBINE
GAS
GENERATOR
LOAD TRQ
(e.g. collective pitch)
t
N2
t
MAIN GEARBOX
N2 SPEED (Transient variation
and quick return to nominal speed)
P2
WF
ACCELERATION
CONTROL UNIT
COLLECTIVE
PITCH CONTROL θ
t
+
FUEL FLOW WF (Variation
controlled by the governor)
N1
GAS GENERATOR
SPEED GOVERNOR
WF
N1
N1*
+
N2
POWER TURBINE
SPEED GOVERNOR
+
t
N1 SPEED (Increase or decrease
to match the load variations)
N2*
VARIATION OF THE MAIN
PARAMETERS IN TIME
PRINCIPLE OF THE CONTROL LOOP
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.11
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TRQ
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
POWER TURBINE GOVERNOR
GAS GENERATOR GOVERNOR
This proportional type governor determines a datum signal
according to the anticipator signal and the actual speed.
This integral type governor controls the datum speed demanded
by the power turbine governor. It achieves this control by
metering the fuel flow.
In stabilized conditions, the flyweight centrifugal force balances
the datum spring force. The lever is in a fixed position in front
of the potentiometric jet. The reduced pressure flows to the
low pressure and a modulated pressure is established in the
chamber. The amplifier piston (subjected to a reference pressure
on one side and to the modulated pressure on the other side)
determines the N1 datum transmitted to the gas generator
governor by a lever and a plunger.
Transient conditions, the anticipator modifies the spring
force while the centrifugal force changes. The lever pivots and
moves in front of the potentiometric jet thus altering the leak
and therefore changing the modulated pressure. The amplifier
piston then moves and, by means of the lever and plunger, sets
a new datum on the gas generator governor. The gas generator
adapts itself to the new condition until the balance is regained.
In stabilized conditions, the flyweight centrifugal force balances
the force of the datum spring. The lever is in a fixed position and
the valve determines a given modulated pressure. The working
piston controls a given position of the metering needle which
meters the fuel flow to obtain the required rotation speed. The
system is "in balance".
In transient conditions, we have seen that the power turbine
governor determines a new datum which upsets the balance. The
lever moves, the leak varies and consequently the modulated
pressure. The working piston moves the metering needle
until the new N1 datum is obtained. The gas generator speed
increases or decreases, thus regulating engine output power
to match the load and obtain a constant power turbine speed.
Thermal compensator
The thermal compensator moves the potentiometric jet as a
function of the fuel temperature, which slightly modifies the
modulated pressure, thus maintaining the max. N1 speed
constant.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.12
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
N2 DATUM
SPRING
Modulated pressure
N2 (approx. 280 kPa)
Modulated pressure
N1 (approx. 300 kPa)
AMPLIFIER
PISTON
LEVER
POTENTIOMETRIC
JET
Reduced pressure
(approx. 400 kPa)
N1 SPEED
DETECTOR
(flyweight)
MAX N1
STOP
LEVER
MIN N1
STOP
DAMPING
DEVICE
N1 DATUM
PLUNGER
N1 DATUM
SPRING
THERMAL
COMPENSATOR
POTENTIOMETRIC
JET
WORKING
PISTON
METERING
NEEDLE
POWER TURBINE GOVERNOR AND GAS GENERATOR GOVERNOR
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.13
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ANTICIPATOR
Low pressure
(approx. 100 kPa)
N2 SPEED DETECTOR
(flyweight)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ACCELERATION CONTROL UNIT
DECELERATION CONTROL UNIT
It limits fuel flow increase in transient conditions, in order to
prevent compressor surge during acceleration.
In some versions, a deceleration control unit (or min flow limiter)
is included in the metering unit to prevent flame-out during
deceleration.
In stabilized conditions, there is a gap between the fork and
the metering needle. The position of the metering needle is
determined by the working piston.
In load increase transient conditions, the governor "responds"
and the working piston moves rapidly. Under the action of its
spring, the metering needle opens until it stops against the
fork. This displacement represents what is called "instant flow
increase" initiating the acceleration. Then the subsequent
increase in P2 pressure causes the deformation of the capsule
which permits further opening of the metering needle until it
comes into contact with the working piston.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
In load decrease transient conditions, the closing of the metering
needle is limited by a mechanical stop.
This mechanical stop is controlled by a diaphragm subjected
to P2 pressure.
The stop withdraws as the P2 pressure decreases in order to
prevent engine flame-out during rapid deceleration.
Edition: May 2014
7.14
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Max. flow for a determined P2
pressure (lever mechanism position)
Max.
X
WF
Max. flow stop of the
acceleration control unit
Min. flow curve
as a function of P2 pressure
"X" instant flow increase =
distance between the metering
valve position and fork position
Min. flow stop of the
acceleration control unit
Min.
P2
ACCELERATION CURVE
(Fuel flow WF as a function of compressor pressure P2)
WORKING
PISTON
GAP (x)
CAM
FUEL METERING
NEEDLE
WORKING
PISTON
DECELERATION
CONTROL UNIT
CAM
x
P0
ACCELERATION
CAPSULE
ACCELERATION
CAPSULE
LEVER
MECHANISM
DIAGRAM OF THE MECHANISM
P2
DECELERATION CURVE
(WF as a function of P2)
P0
P2
BAROSTATIC
DEVICE
P2
METERING
NEEDLE
LEVER
MECHANISM
ACCELERATION CONTROL UNIT AND DECELERATION CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.15
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
WF
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Operation
Metering valve
The metering valve consists of a profiled needle which moves
in a calibrated orifice.
Graph of fuel flow (WF) as a function of metering valve
position (S): each position corresponds to a fuel flow and each
displacement ∆S corresponds to a proportional flow variation
∆WF.
The fuel under pump pressure flows through the passage
determined by the needle sliding in the orifice.
Constant ∆P valve
To obtain a fuel flow solely dependent on the metering valve
position, the constant ∆P valve keeps a constant pressure
difference across the metering valve. It consists of a diaphragm
subjected to pressure variation. Any variation of pressure
difference (∆P) is detected by this valve, which returns more
or less fuel to the pump inlet. In fact, the pump always supplies
more fuel than the engine requires, and the excess fuel is
returned to the pump inlet by this valve.
The ∆P transient variations are due to the pump pressure
variations, to the downstream pressure variations and of course
to the displacement of the metering valve.
For example: when the metering valve opens, the pressure
difference decreases, the ∆P valve diaphragm senses this and
moves to close the return. More fuel is admitted to the engine,
the upstream pressure increases and the nominal ∆P is regained.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.16
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
METERING UNIT
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
CONSTANT
∆P VALVE
FUEL
RETURN
WF
P2
P0
∆WF
S
∆S
WF AS A FUNCTION OF METERING
VALVE POSITIONS (S)
METERING
VALVE
FUEL
OUTLET
(WF)
METERING UNIT
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.17
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FUEL
INLET
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Min. governed speed
Limits of gas generator speeds
The gas generator rotation speed varies (to adapt the engine to
changing conditions) between two extreme limits represented
by adjustable mechanical stops.
Max. speed
It is automatically limited by an adjustable mechanical stop
which represents the max operating rating.
MTOP-Max. Take-Off Power in the case of a single engine (in
fact, this rating is given at a value slightly lower than
the mechanical stop and the engine must be operated
not to overcome it).
MCP -Max. Contingency Power in the case of engine failure
during take-off or landing of a twin engine helicopter
(OEI 2 min. 30 sec.)
The effect of fuel temperature on the speed (variation of fuel
viscosity changing the balance point of the hydromechanical
governor) is compensated by the capsule in order to obtain speed
invariability (especially max. N1). A slight max. N1 variation is
however introduced but within given limits.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
It is limited by an adjustable mechanical stop to avoid low
speeds corresponding to critical ratings. In operation, this limit
is practically never reached because, even at zero torque,
the power to drive the compressor requires a higher speed.
Therefore, the stop is only a safety measure and it is only
adjusted on the FCU test rig.
Limits of fuel flow
Fuel flow variation in transient conditions is limited by the
acceleration control unit to obtain an optimum acceleration
without compressor surge. The acceleration rate determines
the response time. The slope of acceleration is only adjustable
on the test rig.
The min. fuel flow (limit to prevent flame-out) is limited by a
mechanical stop on the metering needle. In some versions,
this stop is variable with P2 pressure; it is also called the
deceleration control unit.
The max. fuel flow is determined by the full opening of the
metering needle for a given pressure difference ∆P. It is a
factory adjustment which represents a sort of power limitation.
In manual control (emergency control), the max. fuel flow is
limited at a lower value to avoid exceeding of the limits.
Edition: May 2014
7.18
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
LIMITS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
N1
N1 max. as a function of
fuel temperature
N1 limit to
ensure power
WF
Metering unit max. WF
Manual control max. WF
(emergency)
Temperature
N1 LIMITS
Metering unit min. WF
(with deceleration
control unit)
Metering unit min. WF
(without deceleration
control unit)
P2
FUEL FLOW LIMITS (WF)
LIMITS
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.19
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
N1 thermal
limit
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TORQUE LIMITATION AND POWER TURBINE
OVERSPEED DETECTION SYSTEM
Torque limitation
A max. torque limit is required by the mechanical transmission.
The control system does not ensure a torque limit and the
operating instructions should be observed to prevent any
overtorque. The flight manual indicates the torque limits: also
see chapter "indication" of this manual for details of the torque
measuring system.
Power turbine overspeed detection system
This detection system is not included in the control unit but
is often mentioned among the functions of the engine control
system.
The overspeed detection system is designed mainly to take
into account the case of shaft failure resulting in a very sudden
acceleration which cannot be contained by the speed governor.
The system includes a speed detector, a tachometer box, the
overspeed electro-valve and the stop purge valve.
The system is currently only used on twin-engine versions.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.20
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
STOP PURGE
VALVE
WF
TACHOMETER
BOX
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
N2
DETECTOR
TRQ
TEST
TORQUE INDICATOR
OVERSPEED
ELECTRO-VALVE
TORQUE LIMITATION - POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION SYSTEM
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.21
CONTROL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
As regards the operation, the control system performance
determines some flight characteristics.
The following can be distinguished:
- The response time
It is the transient speed variation occurring during a load variation.
The amplitude of this variation can be observed on the rotor
speed indicator; it is related to the other characteristics.
Static variation of power turbine speed
- The static and dynamic power turbine speed variations
It can be defined as the speed variation at different ratings. This
static variation (a static droop which is slightly overcompensated)
can be checked by noting NR speed at different operating points
(eg: ground fine pitch and cruise pitch). With the increase of
power, the NR increases slightly within given limits.
- The max. speed of the gas generator.
Response time
It can be defined as the time required to regain power turbine
nominal speed in transient conditions. The response time is
closely associated to the rate of acceleration of the gas generator.
A check of the response time can be made by recording
parameters during a load application. It is less than 4 seconds
between N1 min. and max. in standard conditions.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Dynamic variation of power turbine speed
Max. available speed of the gas generator
It is the max. speed that can be obtained from the gas generator
(take-off on single engine and max. contingency on twin engine).
This rating can be checked on a load application, noting the
max speed obtained when the rotor speed starts decreasing.
Edition: May 2014
7.22
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
N2
N1
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Max.
100%
< 4 sec.
90
time
80
70
< 4 sec.
Min.
100%
RESPONSE TIME AND DYNAMIC
VARIATION OF THE POWER
TURBINE SPEED N2
N2
STATIC VARIATION OF N2
POWER TURBINE SPEED
CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.23
CONTROL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Principle of load sharing
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TWIN-ENGINE CONFIGURATION
In normal conditions, the helicopter rotor is driven by the two
power turbines and therefore:
NR = k.N2 eng 1 = k.N2 eng 2
The speed signals received by the two power turbine governors
being identical (as well as the signals from the collective pitch),
they determine identical datum signals sent to the two gas
generator governors which meter fuel flow to keep them constant.
As the power is closely related to the N1 speed and as the
efficiency does not vary much from one power turbine to another,
a fairly good load sharing is obtained.
Operation on one engine
In this case, the engine remaining in operation supplies the
power while the other one is disconnected by the free wheel.
The limit of the operative engine is represented by the max.
contingency rating automatically limited by the fuel control unit.
This rating, determined for engine failure during take-off or
landing, has a limited duration: 2 min. 30 sec.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.24
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MAIN
GEARBOX
NR = k.N2 eng1 = k.N2 eng2
COLLECTIVE
PITCH
FREE WHEEL
REDUCTION
GEARBOX
N
NR
N2
(1 and 2)
TRQ
TRQ1
and
TRQ2
POWER
TURBINE
GAS
GENERATOR
N2
T4
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
T4
N1 Max.
POWER TURBINE
GOVERNOR
WF
N1
N1
TRIM
N2*
N1*
GAS GENERATOR GOVERNOR
TWIN-ENGINE CONFIGURATION
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.25
CONTROL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Evolution of parameters
Effects of a load increase
θ
- Collective pitch
Sudden increase from min. to max. almost instantly
t=0
-
"Start" = Collective pitch movement
θ
-
The pitch increases
W1 > W
-
The resisting torque becomes higher than the
drive torque
N2
-
The power turbine rotation speed decreases
G
-
The N2 governor detects the 2 signals, and
sends a datum increase to the N1 governor:
the N1 governor increases the fuel flow WF
WF
-
Instantaneous flow step
P2
-
The compressor discharge pressure increases
AC
-
The acceleration control unit enables the
acceleration to continue
Combustion
N1
N2 - Power turbine speed
Transient decrease and rapid return to nominal speed
after a slight overshoot, and a slight overcompensation
of the static droop
N1 - Gas generator speed
Speed increase and stabilisation after a slight overshoot
t
- Time in seconds
- The flow WF increases in the combustion
chamber
- increases, the output power W increases, the N2 speed
stops decreasing and returns to its nominal value when
the equilibrium between torques W1 = W is achieved.
t < 4 sec. -
End of transient
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.26
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP - LOAD INCREASE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
NR
t=0
t
t<4
W=W
N2
1
W >W
N2
1
3
1
N2
2
G
N2
W
WF
N1
P2
N1
t
2
3
1
t
1
3
AC
2
Combustion
2
3
WF
1
Effects of a load increase
N1
N2
Evolution of parameters during a load increase
CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP - LOAD INCREASE
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.27
CONTROL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
Evolution of parameters
Effects of a load decrease
θ
- Collective pitch
Rapid decrease of pitch
t=0
-
"Start" = Collective pitch movement
θ
-
The pitch decreases
W1 < W
-
The resisting torque becomes lower than the
drive torque
N2
-
The power turbine rotation speed increases
N1 - Gas generator speed
Speed decrease and stabilisation
G
-
The governor detects the N2 increase and
decreases the fuel flow WF
t
WF
-
Instantaneous deceleration flow
P2
-
The compressor discharge pressure decreases
DC
-
The deceleration control unit limits the min. fuel
flow (if needs be)
Combustion
N1
N2 - Power turbine speed
Transient increase and return to nominal speed (within
the static droop)
- Time in seconds
- The flow WF decreases in the combustion
chamber
- decreases, the output power W decreases, the N2 speed
returns to its nominal value.
t < 4 sec. -
End of transient
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.28
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP - LOAD DECREASE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
t=0
t<4
t
N2
1
W <W
N2
1
W =W
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
NR
2
1
3
N2
t
N2
N1
G
W
WF
N1
P2
1
3
2
1
DC
t
3
1
2
Combustion
WF
N1
3
N2
2
Effects of a load decrease
Evolution of parameters during a load decrease
CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP - LOAD DECREASE
CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.29
CONTROL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
CONTROL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE
MAINTENANCE
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Scheduled inspections
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.30
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AFTER THE LAST FLIGHT OF THE DAY
MANDATORY
Post TU207:
- Carry out a consistency check
Chap. 05
Note: engines equipped with a tachometer box with
cycle counting aid
Record in the engine log book the cumulated
number of C1 and C2 cycles consumed since
the last recording
Chap. 05
INSPECTION AT 100 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Engine health inspection
Note: In flight
Aircraft documentation
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
CONTROL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
7.31
CONTROL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
8 - MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
- Measurement and indicating systems - Presentation ....................... 8.2
- Speed measurement and indicating system ..................................... 8.4
- T4 measurement and indicating system ............................................. 8.10
- Torque measurement and indicating system ..................................... 8.14
- Miscellaneous indications ................................................................... 8.18
- Measurement and indicating systems - 1st line maintenance ......... 8.22 - 8.23
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.1
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Different measurement and indicating
systems
Functions
The measurement and indicating systems perform the following
functions:
- Check that the engine is operating within its defined limits
- Detect and signal failures or abnormal changes in parameters
- Check certain operating phases.
- N2 (power turbine rotation speed)
- T4 (gas generator turbine outlet temperature)
- Engine torque
- Oil pressure and temperature
Note: A distinction is made between control parameters
(N1 and torque) and monitoring parameters (N2, TET,
oil pressure and oil temperature).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
- N1 (gas generator rotation speed)
- Miscellaneous (indicator lights and monitoring devices).
Edition: May 2014
8.2
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEMS - PRESENTATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
- Check that the engine is operating
within its defined limits
- Detect and signal failures or
abnormal changes in parameters
T4 GAS
TEMPERATURE
- Check certain operating phases
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FUNCTIONS
MISCELLANEOUS
(indicator lights and
monitoring devices)
OIL PRESSURE
AND
TEMPERATURE
VITESSE N1
EXCEPT 1E, 1S:
N2 SPEED
ENGINE
TORQUE
1E, 1S:
N2 SPEED
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.3
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
PRESENTATION
Operation
Function
N1 is an operating parameter as it reflects the engine power
and serves to determine the limit ratings.
This system measures the rotation speeds of the gas generator
(N1) and the power turbine (N2).
The N2 signal is used for the N2 indication (associated with
the NR indication).
Main characteristics
- Type:
• tachometer transmitter
• phonic wheel (according to version)
- Transmitter signals: frequency proportional to the rotation
speed.
Main components
- N1 speed transmitter
- N2 speed transmitter (optional)
- Electrical harnesses for connection to the indicators.
Description
One or two tachometer generators (N2 optional) linked to one
or two indicators.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.4
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
N1 SPEED
SENSOR
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
PHONIC WHEEL
(starter-generator
drive shaft)
N1 SPEED SENSOR
N2 SPEED
SENSOR
REAR OF THE
INTERMEDIATE GEAR
OF THE REDUCTION
GEARBOX
N2
INDICATOR
ACCESSORY GEARBOX
REAR FACE
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
N2 SPEED SENSOR
PRESENTATION
SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.5
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
N1
INDICATOR
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Description
N1 AND N2 TACHOMETER TRANSMITTERS
(EXCEPT 1E, 1S)
The assembly consists of:
Function
The system measures the gas generator rotation speed (N1)
and the power turbine rotation speed (N2).
Position
- A tachometer-generator whose rotor is a mechanically driven
permanent magnet. It delivers a 3-phase AC voltage electrical
signal whose frequency is proportional to the speed
- An asynchronous motor which receives the signal from the
transmitter and displays the speed on a graduated dial.
General operation
- On the rear face of the accessory gearbox:
• N1 on the right-hand side
• N2 on the left-hand side (according to version).
The N1 signal is a control parameter because it reflects the
power being supplied and determines the operating "limit ratings".
The N2 signal is an indicating parameter (associated with the
rotor rotation speed indication (NR)).
Main characteristics
N1/N2 operation
- Type:
• Tachometer-transmitter
• 3-phase permanent magnet generator
The rotation of the permanent magnet in front of the three
windings induces an AC voltage.
- Transmitter signals: frequency proportional to the rotation
speed
The frequency of this AC voltage is proportional to the rotation
speed.
- Quantity: 2 identical N1/N2 transmitters (interchangeable).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.6
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
BODY
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Type:
- Tachometer-transmitter
- 3-phase permanent magnet
generator
Transmitter signals:
Frequency proportional
to the rotation speed
Quantity:
2 identical N1/N2 transmitters
(interchangeable)
ELECTRICAL
PLUG
STATOR
INDICATOR
N1 AND N2 TACHOMETER TRANSMITTERS (EXCEPT 1E, 1S)
SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.7
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEM
Description
The system consists of a toothed wheel, called a phonic wheel,
rotating in front of an electro-magnetic pick-up which is connected
to an indicator.
Function
The system measures the gas generator rotation speed (N1)
and the power turbine rotation speed (N2).
Position
- N1 sensor: on the starter-generator drive shaft
- N2 sensor: at the intermediate gear of the reduction gearbox
casing.
Main characteristics
Operation
The passage of the teeth in front of the electro-magnetic
sensor induces an alternating current in the sensor windings.
This current has a frequency proportional to the speed and the
number of teeth:
F=
nd x N
60
(nd = Number of teeth; N = rotation speed in rpm; F = frequency)
- Type: electro-magnetic
The signal from the sensor is transmitted to the cockpit indicator
which transforms it into an indication which may be analog,
digital or both.
- Quantity: 2 (interchangeable)
- N1 phonic wheel:
• Quantity: 1
• On the starter-generator drive shaft
- N2 phonic wheel:
• Quantity: 1
• On the rear of the intermediate gear of the reduction
gearbox.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.8
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
N1 AND N2 SPEED SENSORS (1E, 1S)
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TO THE INDICATOR
PHONIC WHEEL
SPEED
SENSOR
N1 SPEED
SENSOR
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
REAR CASING OF
THE INTERMEDIATE
GEAR
F=
nd x N
60
PHONIC WHEEL
(starter-generator
drive shaft)
N2 SPEED
SENSOR
INDICATOR
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC
SENSOR
PHONIC
WHEEL
N1 AND N2 SPEED SENSORS (1E, 1S)
SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.9
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
PRESENTATION
Functional description
Function
The gas temperature (T4) is an operating parameter, particularly
during engine starting.
This system measures and indicates the T4 temperature, i.e.
the gas temperature at the gas generator turbine outlet.
As it would be difficult to measure the turbine inlet temperature,
the gas generator outlet temperature is measured.
Position
All versions (except 1E-1S): The system includes thermocouple
probes which are connected to an indicator by means of a
harness.
- All the system components are located on the engine, except
for the T4 indicator.
Main characteristics
- Type: thermocouple probes
- Indication: degrees Celsius.
1E-1S: The thermocouple junction box provides a connection
between the thermocouple probes and the indicator.
The system produces a voltage proportional to the temperature
of a junction of two dissimilar metals.
The voltage produced is measured by a galvanometer indicator
which is graduated in degrees Celsius.
Main components
- Thermocouple probes (x 3)
- Indicator
- 1E-1S: Thermocouple junction box.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.10
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
T4 MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
THERMOCOUPLE
PROBES
GAS GENERATOR
TURBINE
1E/1S
1E-1S: THERMOCOUPLE
JUNCTION BOX
1E/1S
1E-1S:
THERMOCOUPLE
JUNCTION BOX
THERMOCOUPLE
PROBES
Except
1E/1S
T°
Type:
Thermocouple probes
Indication:
Degrees Celsius
T4 TEMPERATURE
INDICATION
PRESENTATION
T4 MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.11
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
T4 MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Thermocouple probes
Function
The thermocouple probes measure the gas temperature (T4)
at the gas generator outlet.
Position
- Around the rear part of the combustion chamber casing.
Function
The thermocouple junction box forms the interface between the
thermocouples and the indicator.
Position
Main characteristics
- On a bracket at the upper part of the power turbine.
- Type: Chromel - Alumel thermocouple
Main characteristics
- Quantity: 3
- Type: box with connectors.
- Connection: in parallel.
Functional description
Functional description
The 3 thermocouple probes are identical. They are positioned
to give a homogeneous measurement. Each probe contains a
hot junction (Chromel - Alumel wires soldered together).
The probes are connected in parallel either to the aircraft
indicator directly or through an amplifier providing analog and
digital outputs.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Thermocouple junction box (1E-1S)
The thermocouple junction box contains connection system of
Chromel - Alumel wires and provides a connection between
the thermocouple probes and the aircraft indicator.
It includes the connectors of the thermocouple probes (x 3)
and of the indicator.
Edition: May 2014
8.12
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
A thermocouple probe produces an electromotive force which
is proportional to the temperature difference between the hot
and the cold junction. The electromotive force is delivered to
the T4 indicator (galvanometer graduated in degrees Celsius).
The reading obtained is an average temperature.
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
1E-1S: THERMOCOUPLE
JUNCTION BOX
1E/1S
Type:
Chromel - Alumel thermocouple
Type:
Box with connectors
Quantity:
3
Connection:
In parallel
Indicator
connector
Thermocouple
connector
Mounting
nut
1E/1S
Cable
1E-1S: THERMOCOUPLE
JUNCTION BOX
THERMOCOUPLE
PROBE
Chromel
Thermocouple
connectors
Cold
junction
INDICATOR
Hot
junction
Alumel
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
T4 MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.13
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
THERMOCOUPLE PROBES
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TORQUE MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEM
Operation
General operation
Function
This system measures and indicates the engine torque at the
reduction gearbox intermediate gear.
Position
- All the system components are located on the engine, except
for the torque indicator.
The reaction torque is transformed into an axial force on the
reduction gearbox intermediate gear. The force is transmitted
to a piston which determines an oil flow modulating a pressure
representative of the torque.
The pressure is transformed into electrical current supplied to
the indicator by a transmitter.
Torquemeter operation
- Type: hydraulic torquemeter
The torque on the output shaft is transmitted to the reduction
gearbox. The intermediate gear, which has helical teeth,
transmits the axial force to the piston, via the stop bearing.
Description
The movement of the intermediate gear/piston assembly varies
the oil flow between the piston and the tube base.
Main characteristics
The torquemeter piston is fitted in the intermediate gear of the
reduction gearbox on a stop bearing.
This pressure variation is felt by the torque transmitter.
The head of the piston fits into a cavity in the reduction gearbox
front casing. An oil tube passes through the hollow shaft of the
piston and forms a passage between the piston and the tube
base. Oil from the torquemeter system can pass through this
passage.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.14
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PRESENTATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
REDUCTION
GEARBOX
CASING
TORQUEMETER
PISTON
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Type:
Hydraulic torquemeter
STOP
BEARING
INTERMEDIATE
GEAR
OIL FLOW
VARIATION
INDICATOR
TRANSMITTER
LIMITED
FLOW
LUBRICATION
TUBE
OIL INLET
(pressure modulated
by the piston)
PRESENTATION
TORQUE MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.15
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TORQUE MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEM
Note: The torque transmitter or the indicator (according to
version) is adjusted and matched to the reduction
gearbox.
Function
The transmitter transforms the hydraulic signal (modulated
pressure from the piston) into an electrical signal and transmits
it to the indicator.
Position
- Rear face of the accessory gearbox.
Main characteristics
- Type: inductive or resistive (according to version).
Description
The system includes:
- A calibrated orifice
- A transmitter
- A pressure tapping point.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.16
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TORQUE TRANSMITTER
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
PUMP
PRESSURE
RESTRICTOR
TORQUEMETER PISTON
MODULATED PRESSURE
INDICATOR
Type:
Inductive or resistive
(according to version)
TRANSMITTER
PRESSURE
TAPPING
Note: The torque transmitter or the indicator (according to version) is adjusted and matched to the reduction gearbox.
TORQUE TRANSMITTER
TORQUE MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.17
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
There are several indicators and instruments which give
information about the engine operation. These pages summarize
the various lights which have already been dealt with in other
chapters.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
Position
- Engine
- On the cockpit instrument panel.
Main characteristics
- Indicator lights directly connected to engine sensors
- Indications provided by the aircraft
- Electrical measurement circuit directly connected to indicators.
Main components
- Sensors and engine accessories (refer to corresponding
chapters for more information)
Lights directly connected to the engine
sensors
- Low oil pressure
- Bleed valve position
- Magnetic particles.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.18
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
+ 28 V
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Low oil pressure
Bleed valve position
Circuit breaker
Magnetic particles
ENGINE
INDICATING:
• Fuel
• Oil
• Air
• Power
• Overspeed
• Fire
AIRFRAME
GENERAL
MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.19
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
Operation
Function
The cycle counter automatically carries out the calculations
stated in the maintenance manual.
Main components
The input signal is the N1 speed supplied by a pick-up or by
the tachometer generator.
With this information, the system converts the engine actual
operating cycles into "reference cycles" and displays the result.
For the power turbine, the relationship is: 1 cycle = 1 start.
- Tachometer box with failure indicator
It is then possible to calculate the number of cycles of life
limited parts.
- Display unit with N1 and N2 cycle displays
The electronic box corresponding to an engine variant can
perform some (or all) of the following functions:
- Electrical connectors.
Note: In the 1E and 1S versions, the same box ensures the
two functions of N2 overspeed detection and cycle
counter.
- Count engine operating cycles
- Control electro-pneumatic compressor bleed valve
- Detect any power turbine overspeed
- Monitor the power turbine.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.20
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CYCLE COUNTER
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FAILURE
INDICATOR
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
DISPLAY
UNIT
N1 AND N2
CYCLE DISPLAYS
N1, N2 AND 24 V
INPUT
Note: In the 1E and 1S versions, the same box ensures the two functions of N2 overspeed
detection and cycle counter.
CYCLE COUNTER
MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.21
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
ARRIEL 1
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING
SYSTEMS - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Scheduled inspections
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.22
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 300 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection and check of torquemeter
transmitter
Chap. 72
Inspection and check of the tachometer
transmitter N1 (NG)
Chap. 77
Inspection and check of the pyrometric harness
attachment (tightness of thermocouples)
Chap. 77
Note: Pyrometric harness installed
INSPECTION AT 750 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection and check of the pyrometric
harness (test)
Chap. 77
INSPECTION AT 1,000 FLIGHT HOURS
MANDATORY
Post TU207:
- Check for correct operation of the
"cycle counting" function for
the tachometer box
Chap. 77
Note: Engines equipped with a tachometer box with
cycle counting aid
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
8.23
MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
9 - STARTING SYSTEM
- Starting system - Presentation ........................................................... 9.2
- Starter-generator ................................................................................... 9.6
- Ignition system ...................................................................................... 9.8
- Starting system - Operation ................................................................. 9.10
- Starting system - 1st line maintenance .............................................. 9.14 - 9.15
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.1
STARTING SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
STARTING SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
Main components
Function
- Starter-generator (cranking)
The starting system is used to start the engine (on the ground
and in flight) and crank the engine. It includes the following
functions: cranking, fuel supply and ignition.
- Ignition units and igniter plugs
Position
All the starting accessories are located on the engine. Indicating
and control components are supplied by the aircraft manufacturer.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
- Fuel system (supply, metering and delivery)
- Indicating and control components:
• Electrical system
• Instruments.
Main characteristics
- Starting envelope: according to version
- Start duration: between 25 and 30 sec.
- Max. crank time: 15 sec.
- Stabilisation time before shut-down: 60 sec.
- Run-down time: > 30 sec. from 30 to 0% N1.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.2
STARTING SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Starting envelope:
According to version
IGNITION
UNITS
IGNITER
PLUGS
Start duration:
Between 25 and 30 sec.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
STARTER-GENERATOR
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Max. crank time:
15 sec.
Stabilisation time before shut-down:
60 sec.
CRANKING
Run-down time:
> 30 sec. from 30 to 0% N1
FUEL SUPPLY AND
DISTRIBUTION
IGNITION
START CONTROL
AND INDICATING
GENERAL
STARTING SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.3
STARTING SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
STARTING SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
The igniter plugs are installed close to the start injectors and
are connected to the ignition units by two cables.
Starter
The starter is electrically supplied with direct current from the
batteries through the aircraft electrical system.
Fuel system
The fuel system supplies fuel to the start and main injectors.
During starting, the starter drives the gas generator rotating
assembly through the accessory drive train.
Control and indicating system
At the end of starting, the electrical supply to the starter is cut.
The control system includes:
The starter is installed on the front face of the gearbox casing.
- The cockpit components (circuit-breaker, crank and start
push-buttons, the manual control lever)
Ignition unit
- The power supply (28 V battery)
The ignition units are of high energy type. They transform the
direct current voltage provided by the aircraft system into high
energy voltage required for the igniter plug operation.
The ignition units are located at the right side of the axial
compressor casing.
- The accessory relay (to electrically supply the starting
accessories)
- The starter contactor
- The overspeed box (twin engine only).
Igniter plugs
The engine has two igniter plugs which ignite the air fuel mixture
sprayed by the start injectors.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.4
STARTING SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
DESCRIPTION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
STARTERGENERATOR
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
CRANK
PUSH-BUTTON
START
PUSH-BUTTON
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
STARTER
CONTACTOR
START
ELECTRO-VALVE
ACCESSORY
RELAY
OVERSPEED
BOX
IGNITION
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
STARTING SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.5
STARTING SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
- Direct current supply to the aircraft system from the startergenerator when the starting phase is completed.
The starter cranks the gas generator rotating assembly during
starting and cranking. At the end of starting (when the rotation
speed is sufficient), the starter operates as a Direct Current
generator.
Operation
Position
- On the front face of the accessory gearbox. It is secured by
a clamp.
Main characteristics
- Supplied by the aircraft manufacturer
Engine cranking
When "START" is selected, the starter contactor closes and
connects the aircraft DC busbar to the starter.
The starter then cranks the rotating assembly through the
accessory drive train.
The torque on the starter shaft is inversely proportional to the
gas generator speed and will be higher when the atmospheric
temperature is low.
- Type: starter-generator
- Supply: VDC through heavy-duty cables (32 V max.)
- The starter-generator
The N1 increases up to self-sustaining speed (45%) at which
point the torque becomes negative. The supply to the starter
is cut by the opening of the starter contactor.
- The mounting flange
Electrical generation
Main components
- The supply terminals.
Interfaces
- Starter electrical supply from the + 28 VDC supply busbar
through the starter contactor
At the end of the start cycle the starter is no longer electrically
supplied and it is driven by the gas generator through the
accessory drive train. Thus it acts as an electrical generator
and supplies current to the aircraft circuit.
- Drive of the gas generator rotating assembly through the
accessory drive train
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.6
STARTING SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
STARTER-GENERATOR
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
DRIVE
SHAFT
STARTERGENERATOR
START
TORQUE
TORQUE WITH A LOWER
ATMOSPHERIC TEMPERATURE
Supplied by
the aircraft manufacturer
Type:
Starter-generator
Electrical supply:
VDC through heavyduty cables (32 V max.)
45%
0
SELF-SUSTAINING SPEED
STARTER
STARTER-GENERATOR
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
N1
Edition: May 2014
GENERATOR
9.7
STARTING SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TERMINALS
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Main components
This system ignites the fuel that is sprayed into the combustion
chamber by the start injectors.
- 2 ignition units (identical, high energy)
Position
- 2 igniter plugs (surface-discharge type, incorporating a central
electrode insulated from the body, and a semi-conductor at
the tip).
With the exception of the electrical supply circuit, all the ignition
system components are located on the engine:
- Ignition units: mounted on a support, on the front right-hand
side of the engine
- 2 ignition cables (identical, triple-braided, high energy)
Functional description
- Ignition cables: between the ignition units and the igniter
plugs
The ignition units are supplied with the DC voltage from the
aircraft mains electrical system, and transform it into a highenergy voltage.
- Igniter plugs: beside the start injectors, on either side of the
turbine casing.
This high-energy voltage (approximately 2 kV) is then delivered
to the igniter plugs through the ignition cables.
Main characteristics
The high-energy voltage produced by the ignition units is supplied
to the central electrode of the igniter plugs. It discharges between
the semi-conductor and the plug body causing powerful sparks.
- Type: High Energy (HE)
- Supply voltage: 28 VDC
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
These sparks ignite the fuel that is sprayed into the combustion
chamber by the start injectors.
Edition: May 2014
9.8
STARTING SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
IGNITION SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Electrical connector
(connection with the ignition unit)
Seals and
spacers
Electrical connector
(to the ignition unit)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Electrical connector
(to the igniter plug)
Body
(-)
Spark
Central
electrode
(+)
IGNITION
CABLE
Identification
plate
IGNITER
PLUG
Insulator
Semiconductor
START
INJECTORS
IGNITER
PLUG
Mounting
flanges
Type:
High Energy (HE)
IGNITION
UNITS
Supply voltage:
28 VDC
IGNITION SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER
9.9
STARTING SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Starting cycle
Crank cycle
The starting cycle is characterised by the evolution of the
engine parameters, especially the rotation speed and the gas
temperature.
Cranking consists of driving the rotating assembly without
supplying fuel or energising the ignition system ("dry" crank).
It is used to cool the engine or for maintenance procedures.
The main phases of the starting cycle are:
The main phases of the crank cycle are:
- Start selection
- Selection of crank
- Self-sustaining speed (de-energisation of the starter and
ignition units)
- Driving of the rotating assembly
- End of start (stabilisation at min. power).
Shut-down cycle
- End of cranking and run-down.
Note: Cranking time is limited to a maximum of 15 seconds
to avoid overheating of the starter.
The main phases of the shut-down cycle are:
- Stabilisation at idle speed
- Stop selection
- Run-down and stop.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.10
STARTING SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
STARTING SYSTEM - OPERATION (1)
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
N1
+
Stop selection
Stabilisation
at idle speed
Starting
accessories
ACCESSORY
RELAY
Run-down
CRANK SELECTION
+
STARTER
CONTACTOR
Startergenerator
T4
N1
N2 100%
N1
Dry crank cancel
Run-down
N1 idle
Self-sustaining
speed
Approx. 200°C
(injection wheel
supply)
Selection
STARTING CYCLE
time
Selection
STARTING SYSTEM - OPERATION (1)
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
time
SHUT-DOWN CYCLE
Edition: May 2014
(15 sec. max.)
CRANK CYCLE
time
9.11
STARTING SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
START
SELECTION
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Power supply of the helicopter "ON"
Stop
- Valves closed, metering needle closed by the cam.
- After stabilisation pull the control lever to the "stop" position:
the main valve closes. Note the run-down time.
Booster pumps switched on
Crank
- Purge of the fuel system with a return to the tank.
- Power supply switched on
Starting
- Press the crank push-button (max. 15 sec.):
• power supply to the starter motor via the starter contactor.
- The control lever is moved to the "start" position:
• slight opening of the main valve
- Pushing the start push button initiates the start by electrically
supplying:
• the starter
• the start electro-valve (which opens)
• the ignition system
- At 45% of N1 (self-sustaining speed) it is necessary to release
the start push button to cut the supply to the start relay and
accessories.
Note: During starting, it is necessary to control the acceleration
of the engine, with the control lever, and to observe the
N1 speed and T4 temperature.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.12
STARTING SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
STARTING SYSTEM - OPERATION (2)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
STARTING SYSTEM - OPERATION (2)
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.13
STARTING SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
STARTING SYSTEM - 1ST LINE
MAINTENANCE
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Scheduled inspections
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.14
STARTING SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 300 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection and check of H.E. generators
Inspection and check of the ignition
cables
Inspection of the ignition plugs
Operational check of each starting
system
Note: During a ground run
OPTIONAL
Inspection and check (test) of the H.E.
generators and H.E. igniters
Chap. 74
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
STARTING SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
9.15
STARTING SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
- Electrical system - Presentation .......................................................... 10.2
- Power turbine overspeed detection system ....................................... 10.4
- Electrical harnesses ............................................................................. 10.16
- Electrical system - 1st line maintenance ............................................ 10.18 - 10.19
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
10 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Main components
The electrical system contributes to the engine control and
indicating functions:
- Electrical components of the engine (accessories and sensors)
- Electrical controls
- Control and indicating components (airframe)
- Electrical harnesses.
- Control system
- Safety systems.
Main characteristics
- Direct current: 28 VDC from the airframe electrical system.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.2
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
CONTROL
AND INDICATING
COMPONENTS
ELECTRICAL
HARNESSES
Direct current:
28 VDC from the airframe
electrical system
ACCESSORIES
AND SENSORS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.3
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION
SYSTEM
Description
The speed sensor is mounted facing two phonic wheels with
a different number of teeth, mounted on the turbine shaft. It is
connected to the tachometer box (in the aircraft).
Function
The safety system causes the immediate shut-down of the
engine in the event of power turbine overspeed.
The system (mainly designed to protect against shearing of the
power shaft) requires a very quick response and high reliability.
This detection system is only installed in twin-engine
configurations.
Position
The tachometer box electrically supplies the overspeed electrovalve mounted on the stop purge valve.
Operation
In the event of an overspeed, when the tachometer box receives
two frequency signals, it energises the overspeed electro-valve
to move to drain position causing the engine shut-down.
All the components are installed on the engine, except the
tachometer box which is mounted on the aircraft.
Main characteristics
Overspeed setting: 120% N2
- Automatic test:
• for each start
• during periodic inspection.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.4
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Automatic test:
• for each start
• during periodic inspection
SPEED
SENSOR
PHONIC
WHEELS
TACHOMETER
BOX
OVERSPEED
ELECTRO-VALVE
This
detection system is
only installed in
twin-engine
configurations
OVERSPEED
ELECTRO-VALVE
SPEED
SENSOR
TACHOMETER
BOX
GENERAL
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.5
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Overspeed setting:
120% N2
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED SENSOR
Description
Function
The sensor is fitted facing the phonic wheels, it includes two
electro-magnetic pick-ups.
The power turbine overspeed sensor monitors N2 and transmits
the signal to the tachometer box (twin-engine versions).
The sensor is secured by a hollow bolt and is fitted with a
locating pin to ensure the correct orientation.
Position
Operation
Screwed into the bottom of module 4 casing.
The passage of the teeth in front of the electro-magnetic sensor
induces two alternating currents having a frequency proportional
to the speed and to the number of teeth :
Main characteristics
- Double pick-up
- Type: Electro-magnetic.
nd x N
F =
60
(nd = number of teeth, N = rotation speed in rpm, F = Frequency)
As the phonic wheels don't have the same number of teeth,
the double sensor gives two different frenquencies proportional
to the speed.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION
SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
TO THE TACHOMETER BOX
Type:
Electro-magnetic
F = nd x N
60
SENSOR
PHONIC WHEEL
PHONIC WHEELS
SENSOR
LOCATING
DOWEL
HOLLOW
BOLT
TACHOMETER
BOX
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC
PICK-UP
PHONIC
WHEEL
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED SENSOR
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.7
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Double pick-up
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION
SYSTEM
The tachometer box is mounted in the aircraft, it is connected
to the overspeed sensor by an electrical harness.
Function
To supply the overspeed electro-valve in case of an overspeed
detection and to control the operation of the bleed valve
(according to version).
Position
Description
It includes two frequency detectors, a V relay, a bistable relay
S and S', a re-arming and a test push-button.
A cross-monitoring system between the two overspeed boxes
inhibits the overspeed detection system of the other engine in
case of overspeed.
- In the aircraft
Main characteristics
- Electronic box
- Automatic test
- Periodic test.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.8
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TACHOMETER BOX - GENERAL - DESCRIPTION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
TEST
OSCILLATOR
RE-ARMING
PUSH-BUTTON
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
S
120%
N2
120%
N2
V
OVERSPEED ELECTRO-VALVE
TEST
SELECTOR
ENGINE
SHUT-DOWN
INHIBITION OF STARTING
INHIBITION OF THE OTHER ENGINE
SYSTEM
25%
S'
TEST
RE-ARMING
OVERSPEED
CONNECTOR
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
FOR THE COMPRESSOR
BLEED VALVE CONTROL
25%
POSSIBLE INHIBITION OF THIS SYSTEM
TACHOMETER BOX - GENERAL - DESCRIPTION
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.9
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TEST
PUSH-BUTTON
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION
SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (1)
Power on
At power on, the sensors give the F1 and F2 frequencies to
frequency detectors which supply the light through the mutual
monitoring system (up 25% of N2).
Re-arming is possible.
Overspeed condition
In the event of N2 overspeed (N2 approx. 120%), the two signals
of N2 (F1 and F2) are supplied to the two frequency detectors
which complete the circuit through relay V.
Relay V closes its contacts:
• supplying relay S
• breaking the circuit of the other engine.
The contacts of relay S
• open the other engine's overspeed circuit
• supply the overspeed solenoid
• open the start circuit
• open the overspeed light circuit.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
TEST
POWER ON
- The light turns on (up to
25% of N2)
- Re-arming (if necessary)
S
N2
120%
N2
V
OVERSPEED
- Supply of the
mono-stable relay V
- Supply of the bistable
relay S
- Supply of the overspeed
electro-valve
- Inhibition the other
engine system
- Inhibition of starting
120%
OVERSPEED ELECTRO-VALVE
ENGINE
INHIBITION OF STARTING
SHUT-DOWN
INHIBITION OF THE OTHER ENGINE
SYSTEM
25%
S'
RE-ARMING
25%
POSSIBLE INHIBITION OF THIS SYSTEM
POWER ON
OVERSPEED
TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (1)
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
OSCILLATOR
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION
SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (2)
Automatic monitoring (all versions except
1E and 1S)
The condition of the pick-up signals is checked at each start
with the light turning off above 25% N2.
Periodic test
Engine stopped, operation of the push-button simulates an
overspeed:
• the light goes off
• the electro-valve is supplied
• the start system is inhibited
After this test, it is necessary to re-arm the system.
Re-arming
When the re-arm push-button is pressed the relay S' is supplied
and the relay returns to the normal position.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.12
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
TEST
OSCILLATOR
- Supply of the oscillator
120% *
- Oscillator inhibited for
N2 > 25%
AUTOMATIC MONITORING
ALL VERSIONS EXCEPT
1E AND 1S: WHATEVER N1
S
120%
N2
120%
N2
V
OVERSPEED ELECTRO-VALVE
N2 (x)
N2 (y)
OK
OK
Light off
OK
0
Light on
0
OK
Light on
0
0
Light on
ENGINE
INHIBITION OF STARTING
SHUT-DOWN
INHIBITION OF THE OTHER ENGINE
SYSTEM
25%
S'
RE-ARMING
OVERSPEED MANUAL TEST
25%
POSSIBLE INHIBITION OF THIS SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC MONITORING
TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (2)
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.13
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
OVERSPEED
MANUAL TEST
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION
SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (3)
Automatic monitoring (1E, 1S versions)
This protection does not exist on all boxes.
- Above 25% N2 and below 82% N1: the loss of one N2 speed
signal is indicated by the light staying "on".
- Above 25% N2 and 82% N1:
• the loss of one N2 speed signal is also indicated by the
light staying "on"
• the loss of two N2 speed signals causes the engine to
be shut down by the overspeed system.
- Above 25% N2.
• the loss of the N1 speed signal or any defect of the
detection stage is indicated by the flashing of the light.
Note: In all cases of engine shut-down by overspeed, starting
is not possible.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.14
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TEST
AUTOMATIC MONITORING
1S, 1E VERSIONS:
N1 < 82%
N2 (x)
N2 (y)
OK
OK
Light off
OK
0
Light on
0
OK
Light on
0
0
Light on
OSCILLATOR
S
N1 > 82%
N2 (y)
OK
OK
Light off
OK
0
Light on
0
OK
Light on
0
0
Pre TU 369:
Engine shut-down
Post TU 369:
Light on
N2 > 25%
ENGINE
SHUT-DOWN
120%
N2
V
INHIBITION OF STARTING
INHIBITION OF THE OTHER ENGINE
SYSTEM
25%
S'
RE-ARMING
N1
0
N2
OVERSPEED ELECTRO-VALVE
N2 (x)
OK
120%
1S, 1E
VERSION
25%
Light on
Light flashing
82%
1E, 1S VERSION MONITORING
N1
POSSIBLE INHIBITION OF THIS SYSTEM
TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (3)
POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED DETECTION SYSTEM
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.15
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ELECTRICAL HARNESSES
The electrical harnesses connect the engine's electrical
components to the airframe.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Function
Functional description
All engine versions have a multi-pin plug for the engine/aircraft
interface and a second electrical plug for the pyrometric system
(except on ARRIEL 1S1: only one electrical plug for the two
harnesses).
On the twin-engine version : a harness for the N2 speed detection
to stop the engine in case of overspeed.
Note: The starter-generator cables must also be mentioned.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
N2 SPEED DETECTION
HARNESS FOR THE
OVERSPEED SYSTEM
(twin-engine version)
PYROMETRIC
HARNESS
ACCESSORY
HARNESS
ARRIEL 1S1: only one connector
ELECTRICAL HARNESSES
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Edition: May 2014
10.17
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ARRIEL 1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE
MAINTENANCE
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Scheduled inspections
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.18
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 300 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection and check of control and
monitoring harness (tightness and
locking of connectors)
Chap. 71
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
10.19
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
- Engine compartment ............................................................................ 11.2
- Engine mounting and lifting ................................................................ 11.4
- Air intake and exhaust systems .......................................................... 11.6
- Engine/airframe system interfaces ..................................................... 11.8
- Drains - Purges - Air vents ................................................................... 11.16
- Power drive ............................................................................................ 11.18
- Fire protection ....................................................................................... 11.20
- Engine installation - 1st line maintenance ......................................... 11.22 - 11.25
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.1
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
11 - ENGINE INSTALLATION
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Description
The engine compartment houses the engine and ensures its
ventilation.
A typical twin-engine installation includes the following
components:
Position
- At the rear of the helicopter main gearbox.
Main characteristics
- Insulated compartments
- Ventilation by air circulation.
Main components
- Firewalls
- Cowlings
- Support platform.
- Two areas separated by a central firewall:
• Right engine area
• Left engine area
- Three main firewalls:
• Front firewall
• Rear firewall
• Central firewall.
- The main engine mountings
- Two main cowlings:
• The air inlet cowling which permits access to the air
intake
• The engine cowling which permits access to the engine
and to the exhaust system.
The compartment ventilation is ensured by air circulation in order
to maintain an acceptable temperature in the various areas.
The ventilation can be increased by the compressor bleed valve
air discharging into the engine compartment.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.2
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
ENGINE
SUPPORT
PLATFORM
FRONT
FIREWALL
ENGINE
MOUNTING
MAIN
GEARBOX
EXAMPLE OF SINGLE-ENGINE INSTALLATION
AIR INLET
COWLING
Edition: May 2014
REAR
FIREWALL
ENGINE
COWLING
EXAMPLE OF TWIN-ENGINE INSTALLATION
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
CENTRAL
FIREWALL
11.3
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
- Insulated compartments
- Ventilation by air circulation
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ENGINE MOUNTING
ENGINE LIFTING
Function
Function
The engine mountings attach the engine to the airframe.
The 3 lifting rings are used to lift the engine.
Description
- Front mounting: at the front lower part of the accessory
gearbox casing,
- Rear mounting: at the front lower part of the reduction gearbox
casing, or on the protection tube (according to version).
Functional description
The front and rear engine mountings differ according to the
engine variant concerned.
- All variants except E-K-S:
• Front mounting - ring of bolts on the front support casing
front flange
• Rear mounting - a cradle under the protection tube,
secured by two clamps
- Variants E-K-S:
• Front mounting - yoke bolted to the front face of the
accessory gearbox, supported on two trunnion mounts,
• Rear mounting - a rod connects to the bracket on the
bottom of module M05.
Description
- 3 lifting rings: 2 at the front and 1 at the rear.
Engine removal and installation
Turbomeca supplies an engine lifting beam which attaches to
the lifting rings on the engine.
This allows the engine to be removed from and installed in the
airframe.
The removal/installation procedure is described in the Airframe
Maintenance Manual. Engine removal and installation must only
be carried out in accordance with this procedure and using the
appropriate tooling.
- Variant E:
• Front mounting: 2 lateral supports fitted on the accessory
gearbox
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.4
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ENGINE MOUNTING AND LIFTING
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
MOUNTING BY
CLAMPS ON THE
PROTECTION TUBE
ENGINE LIFTING
BEAM
ALL VARIANTS EXCEPT E-K-S
ALL VARIANTS EXCEPT E-K-S
REAR LIFTING
RING
FRONT LIFTING
RINGS
MOUNTING BY TWO
ATTACHMENT
POINTS ON THE
AIRFRAME
VARIANTS E-K-S
REAR
MOUNTING
VARIANT E
ENGINE MOUNTING AND LIFTING
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
VARIANTS E-K-S
11.5
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MOUNTING BY THE
FRONT SUPPORT
CASING FRONT FLANGE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Function
Function
The air intake system directs the ambient air into the engine.
The exhaust system discharges the exhaust gas overboard.
Position
Position
- In front of the engine.
- At the rear of the engine.
Main characteristics
Main characteristics
- Type: static or dynamic, annular
- Type: divergent
- Airflow: 2.5 kg/sec. (5.5 lb/sec.).
- Gas temperature: 600°C (1080°F).
Main components
Main components
- Helicopter air intake
- Exhaust pipe
- Intake duct
- Exhaust extension.
- Anti-icing system.
Functional description
Functional description
A circular flange on the compressor casing permits connection
of the aircraft air intake duct. The admission of air can be made
through a static or a dynamic intake which can be provided with
protection devices (filters, anti-icing...). A pressurised seal can
also be fitted to improve the connection sealing. Some versions
are provided with a device for compressor washing.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
The exhaust expels the gases directly but it can be adapted to
the aircraft by means of an extension. The engine compartment
ventilation can be accelerated by venturi effect between the
engine exhaust pipe and the aircraft duct.
Edition: May 2014
11.6
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
Type:
Static or dynamic, annular
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Type:
Divergent
Airflow:
2.5 kg/sec. (5.5 lb/sec.)
Gas temperature:
600°C (1080°F)
AIR
DUCT
ANTI-ICING
SEAL
EXHAUST
PIPE
FILTER
VENTURI TO ACCELERATE
COMPARTMENT VENTILATION
UNION FOR
COMPRESSOR WASHING
AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
EXTENSION
Edition: May 2014
11.7
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES
For each engine, the oil system has 3 engine/airframe interfaces
as follows:
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
OIL SYSTEM
- Oil return line to the airframe oil cooler
- Oil supply line to the oil pump pack
- The vent line: from the oil tank to the accessory gearbox and
to the exhaust.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.8
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
AIRFRAME
BREATHING
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
OIL
SUPPLY
ENGINE
OIL RETURN
TO THE COOLER
OIL SYSTEM
ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.9
ENGINE INSTALLATION
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
AIRFRAME LOW PRESSURE FUEL SYSTEM
Functional description
Function
The interface comprises the union on the FCU and return to tank
union. The aircraft system may include various devices: vent,
level indication, filler neck, booster pump, pressure indicator,
flowmeter. The booster pump will prime the engine system and
prevent cavitation of the pump.
The system supplies the engine with fuel under determined
conditions of pressure, flow, temperature and filtering.
Main characteristics
- Filtering 10 microns.
Main components
- Fuel tank
- Booster pump (except 1S)
The filtering unit, normally fitted with a pre-blockage indicator and
a by-pass valve is in the line before the shut-off valve which is
used to isolate the engine compartment from the aircraft system.
Note: In the 1E, 1S versions, the fuel inlet union is located on
the LP fuel system, located under the engine.
- Filter assembly
- Fuel shut-off valve
- Fuel inlet union
- Return to tank union.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.10
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TO HP PUMP
(FCU)
FUEL INLET
UNION
FUEL SHUT-OFF
VALVE
RETURN TO
TANK UNION
FUEL SUCTION
FROM TANK
FILTER UNIT
(filtering 10 microns)
FUEL
TANK
1E, 1S VERSIONS
BOOSTER
PUMP
(except 1S)
AIRFRAME LOW PRESSURE FUEL SYSTEM
ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.11
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES
Functional description
Function
To allow the control of the fuel valves and of the anticipator.
Position
The engine control lever and the collective pitch lever are in the
cockpit and are mechanically connected to the FCU.
- Engine control lever (lever actuating 2 valves and a cam
in the fuel control unit: see chapter "FUEL SYSTEM" and
aircraft manuals for the mechanical linkage).
- Anticipator control (linkage with the helicopter collective pitch:
see operation of the anticipator in the chapter "CONTROL
SYSTEM" and details of the mechanical connection in the
aircraft manuals).
Main components
- Control lever
- Collective pitch lever
- Fuel control unit.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.12
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
MECHANICAL CONTROLS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
FUEL VALVE
CONTROL
CONTROL LEVER
ANTICIPATOR
CONTROL
COLLECTIVE
PITCH LEVER
MECHANICAL CONTROLS
ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.13
ENGINE INSTALLATION
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES
Possible uses of the air
Function
- Cabin heating
The system provides warm compressed air to the aircraft for
the aircraft services.
- Pressurised seal
Position
- Particle separator...
One tapping boss on each side of the centrifugal compressor
casing.
Main components
- Air intake anti-icing
Note: Refer to aircraft manuals for detailed description of these
systems.
- Air tapping points (x 2).
Functional description
Aircraft pipes can be connected to the two tapping points to
supply a given flow of P2 air. The flow is limited by restrictors
but any air bleed affects engine performance.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.14
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
AIR SYSTEM
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
P2 TAPPING
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
P2
AIR SYSTEM
ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.15
ENGINE INSTALLATION
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Description
These devices drain and purge fluids from certain areas of the
engine, and vent the oil system.
Drains
Main components
The pipes from the output shaft seal drain, FCU drive drain
and combustion chamber drain valve are connected to the
drain collector, which is fitted on a bracket at the bottom of
the accessory gearbox casing. The drain collector discharge
pipe is a flexible pipe connected to the aircraft drain. The gas
generator rear bearing oil supply drain pipe drains into the
engine compartment. The 2 exhaust pipe drains join together
to form one single pipe, which is connected to the aircraft drain.
Drains
Purges
-
The start purge valve pipe returns to the fuel tank. The stop
purge valve pipe is connected to the drain collector (pre TU262)
or returns to the fuel tank (post TU262).
Position
- Various pipes located on the engine
Main characteristics
- Stainless steel pipes
Output shaft seal drain
FCU drive drain
Combustion chamber drain valve
Gas generator rear bearing oil supply drain
Exhaust pipe drains (x 2)
Air vents
The centrifugal breather outlet is connected to a T-union. The
front of this T-union is connected to the oil tank air vent pipe,
and the rear is connected to the oil system air vent pipe. These
pipes vent into the flow of exhaust gases. The gas generator
rear bearing air vent pipe vents into the flow of exhaust gases
or into the engine compartment (according to version).
Purges
- Start purge valve
- Stop purge valve
Air vents
- Oil tank air vent (supplied by the aircraft manufacturer)
- Oil system air vent (supplied by the aircraft manufacturer)
- Gas generator rear bearing air vent
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.16
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
DRAINS - PURGES - AIR VENTS
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
OIL TANK AIR VENT
(supplied by the
aircraft manufacturer)
GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARING
AIR VENT
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
DRAIN VALVE
START PURGE
VALVE
From
oil tank
To fuel
tank
To exhaust/engine
compartment
GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARING
OIL SUPPLY DRAIN
STOP PURGE
VALVE
(pre TU262)
EXHAUST PIPE
DRAIN
FCU DRIVE
DRAIN
STOP PURGE
VALVE
(post TU262)
OUTPUT SHAFT
SEAL DRAIN
OUTPUT
SHAFT DRAIN
To fuel
tank
To
engine
compartment
To airframe
drain
To airframe
drain
DRAINS - PURGES - AIR VENTS
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
OIL SYSTEM AIR VENT
(supplied by the
aircraft manufacturer)
Edition: May 2014
11.17
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Function
Functional description
The power drive transmits the engine power to the helicopter
main gearbox through a drive shaft.
The engine drive shaft consists of a steel tube, fitted with the
following elements at each end:
The link is made by a transmission shaft designed to absorb
the engine torque and slight misalignements (supply by aircraft
manufacturer or TURBOMECA according to version)
- A triangular flange connected to the MGB input flange with
a flexible coupling
Position
- A splined flange, connected to an adaptor flange which is
connected to the engine drive shaft flange with a flector.
The flexible couplings are installed between the flanges. They
transmit torque, absorb shock and vibration and allow slight
misalignment.
- Between the engine and the helicopter main gearbox.
Main characteristics
- Shaft designed to absorb the engine torque and slight
misalignments
Note: In single-engine versions, the free wheel unit drives the
main gearbox and the tail rotor shaft drive.
- Rotation speed: 6000 rpm at 100%.
Main components
The main components are:
• The engine drive shaft flange
• The flector (engine end)
• The adapting flange
• The drive shaft
• The flexible coupling (MGB end)
• The main gearbox input flange.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.18
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
POWER DRIVE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
ENGINE
DRIVE-FLANGE
DRIVE
SHAFT
1S VERSION
Shaft designed to
absorb the engine
torque and slight
misalignments
Rotation speed:
6000 rpm at 100%
SPLINES
ADAPTOR FLANGE
(splined)
FLEXIBLE
COUPLING
MAIN GEARBOX
INPUT FLANGE
1E VERSION
POWER DRIVE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.19
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
FLECTOR
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FIRE PROTECTION
Fire detectors
Function
The fire detection system detects overtemperature in the engine
compartment and gives a cockpit indication. An extinguishing
system is installed in the aircraft.
Main characteristics
- Supplied by the engine manufacturer (except 1S)
• Bi-metallic detectors,
The detection is ensured by non-sealed detectors with normally
closed contact (all versions except 1E and 1S) or one sealed
detector with normally open contact (1E) or by means of an
aircraft mounted optical device (1S).
Some detectors (all variants except 1A, 1B, 1E and 1S) have
a resistor fitted in parallel, which allows you to differenciate
between the different operating statuses (normal, overtemp or
wiring anomaly).
In the case of detectors with normally closed contact, the
detectors are installed in series and have a setting which
corresponds to the engine area of location ("cold" area or "hot"
area) and thus they are not interchangeable.
- Supplied by the aircraft manufacturer
• Optical detectors (1S only)
• Indicating system
• Extinguishing system.
Fire extinguishing system (only on twinengine aircraft)
Description
- Engine: six detectors (except: 1E: one detector, 1S: no
detectors) and the harness (fire proof cables),
- Airframe: two detectors (1E and 1S), extinguishing system
and a test system.
The fire extinguishing system is supplied by the aircraft
manufacturer. It includes two extinguisher bottles and
spraying jets which spray the extinguishing product, and
can be triggered from the cockpit.
Note: For more information on the fire extinguishing system,
refer to the aircraft manufacturer's documentation.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.20
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Fire detection system
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
+
Alarm
Area 1
(cold)
Area 2
(hot)
Supplied by the engine
manufacturer (except 1S):
• Bi-metallic detectors
Detection
Supplied by the aircraft
manufacturer:
• Optical detectors (1S only)
• Indicating system
• Extinguishing system
logic
+
Test button
EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
(bottle, manifold... )
(only on twin-engine helicopters)
+
Extinguishing
button
PRINCIPLE OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
All versions except 1E and 1S (6 detectors)
1E
1E
NON-SEALED DETECTOR
(all versions except 1E and 1S)
SEALED DETECTOR
(1E and after TU 294)
FIRE PROTECTION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
1S
1E and 1S (2 detectors on aircraft)
POSITION OF DETECTORS
11.21
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Airframe Engine
ARRIEL 1
ENGINE INSTALLATION - 1ST LINE
MAINTENANCE
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Scheduled inspections
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.22
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (1)
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION BEFORE THE FIRST FLIGHT OF THE DAY
MANDATORY
Make sure the engine (that may have
undergone repairs subsequent to the
inspection after the last flight) is
in good flight condition
TURN-AROUND INSPECTION
MANDATORY
Remove the blanks and make sure that there are
no foreign objects: examine near the air intakes
and the exhaust zone
INSPECTION AFTER THE LAST FLIGHT OF THE DAY
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Make sure that there are no foreign objects:
examine near the air intakes and the exhaust zone.
Install the blanks
Check cowling condition (articulation, locking)
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
INSPECTION AFTER 15 FLIGHT HOURS OR 7 DAYS
MANDATORY
Carry out a run-up. After this run,
proceed with an "after the last flight
of the day" type inspection
Chap. 71
Note: If the aircraft remains on the ground over a week
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection of the free wheel operation:
with the rotor brake on, actuate by hand
the blades of the free turbine, from inside
the exhaust pipe. Seen from the rear,
the free turbine must rotate counter-clockwise
and be locked clockwise
Examine the engine: tightness of mating
surfaces and pipes, condition of the casing,
the exhaust pipe and the exhaust pipe attachment
Examine the engine: attachment of the
accessories and pipes and make sure that pipes
show no signs of wear caused by insufficient
clearance between pipes and engine
Condition and attachment of the engine:
compulsory check of the front support
Examine the engine: connection of
the FCU controls
Condition check of the electric equipment
and harness attachments (locking of connectors)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (1)
ENGINE INSTALLATION - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.23
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
ARRIEL 1
ENGINE INSTALLATION - 1ST LINE
MAINTENANCE
Mandatory maintenance tasks
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).
Operations to be performed to comply with Airworthiness
objectives are listed in the table of mandatory maintenance tasks.
Scheduled inspections
Manufacturer-required maintenance tasks
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Inspection before the first flight of the day
- Turn-around inspection
- Inspection after the last flight of the day
The manufacturer considers that the manufacturer-required
maintenance tasks must be carried out at the scheduled
inspection frequency. Failure to do so may cause occurrences
liable to affect the engine operating safety.
- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days
Optional maintenance tasks
- Inspection at 30 flight hours
Optional maintenance tasks are recommended by the
manufacturer as a means of improving reliability, increasing
operational availability and reducing operating costs.
- Inspection at 50 flight hours
- Inspection at 100 flight hours
- Inspection at 150 flight hours
- Inspection at 200 flight hours
- Inspection at 300 flight hours
- Inspection at 400 flight hours
- Inspection at 500 flight hours
- Inspection at 600 flight hours
- Inspection at 750 flight hours
Note 1: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service
Letters.
Note 2: The maintenance tasks shown below concern the
ARRIEL 1D1 variant by way of example and may
differ for other ARRIEL 1 variants. Always refer to the
Maintenance Manual of the variant concerned.
- Inspection at 1,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,200 flight hours
- Inspection at 1,500 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,000 flight hours
- Inspection at 3,600 flight hours
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.24
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (2)
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (scheduled inspections)
INSPECTION AT 100 FLIGHT HOURS
INSPECTION AT 600 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspect visually the two attachment clamps
of engine (condition and locking)
INSPECTION AT 150 FLIGHT HOURS
OPTIONAL
Clean the air duct when the engine
comes for inspection
Chap. 71
INSPECTION AT 300 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection and check of the accessories
(attachment, condition of the pipes, supports
and unions, locking of connectors)
Inspection and check of the pipes
and supports
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection of the fire detection system
(attachment, supports, locking
of connectors)
Chap. 26
Visual inspection of a fire detector
Chap. 26
INSPECTION AT 1,500 FLIGHT HOURS
MANUFACTURER-REQUIRED
Inspection and check of the engine front
support for cracks
Chap. 72
Chap. 70
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (2)
ENGINE INSTALLATION - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
11.25
ENGINE INSTALLATION
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
(refer to MM, chapter 05)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
- General ................................................................................................... 12.2
- Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 12.4
- Conclusion ............................................................................................ 12.10 - 12.11
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
12 - TROUBLESHOOTING
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Introduction
Repair procedure
Troubleshooting is a very important aspect of maintenance.
The repair procedure should be guided by two main
considerations:
It allows the probable cause(s) of a failure to be identified.
Efficient diagnosis reduces the extra maintenance costs due to
unjustified removals and additional diagnosis time.
In fact, even with a very high-reliability product, failure is inevitable
and required actions should be taken efficiently.
- Minimum downtime
- Justified removal of components.
The procedure to be applied depends on the case concerned
but, in general, good knowledge of the product and methodical
research allows a safe diagnosis and quick corrective action.
Generally, the procedure includes the identification of the failure,
its analysis, the isolation of the non-conforming component, and
the choice of the repair to be applied.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.2
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
GENERAL
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Inevitable
Random
Failure
(single, double,
dormant)
Troubleshooting/
repair
- Diagnosis
- Remedy
- Repair
- Check
MTTR
(Mean Time To Repair)
- Appropriate means and
procedures
- Training of personnel
Symptoms (additional information, etc.)
Do not neglect any components and take
interactions into consideration.
Analysis of the anomaly
Isolation of the non-conforming component
Or other means
of detection
Additional
checks
Total time required for
troubleshooting / repair
Substitution
Remedy
(adjustment, replacement, cleaning, repair)
GENERAL
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Deduction
Edition: May 2014
12.3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06
On selection of start, N1 increase, but no increase in T4
The ignition
system operates
(noise of HE components)
Yes
No
Note: Refer to the test
procedure in order
to discriminate
Possible start on
1 injector +
1 igniter plug if
on the same side
Note:
Yes
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
It is also possible to check the
fuel flow through the combustion
chamber drain valve.
Fuel flow
No
STARTING ANOMALIES (1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06
T4
approx. 200°C
Abnormal T4 rise
T4 > 200°C
but not sufficient
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
T4
too high
Increase due to the
injectors, but the
main system is not
supplied
Note: In all cases, check the electrical supply
(battery voltage).
STARTING ANOMALIES (2)
TROUBLESHOOTING
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.5
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Crank selection
(press and hold)
REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06
Note: 15 sec. max. to avoid starter
overheat
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
N1 indication
No
Yes
The starter turns
Yes
No
The gas generator
is driven
Yes
Starting is
possible
No
Yes
"Normal"
crank
No
ANOMALIES DURING CRANKING
TROUBLESHOOTING
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06
Abnormal oil pressure indication
Low pressure
Yes
No pressure
Low oil
pressure light
illuminated?
Variation
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
High pressure
No
LUBRICATION ANOMALIES
TROUBLESHOOTING
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06
Uncommanded shut-down
Operation
of the power turbine
overspeed safety
system
Yes
Yes
Actual overspeed
N2, N1, TRQ, T4, oil pressure decrease
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
No
No
Doubt
Note: Unlikely
Note: In a twin engine configuration, the engine which remains in
operation supplies the required power within its limits.
ANOMALIES LEADING TO IN-FLIGHT SHUT-DOWN
TROUBLESHOOTING
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Abnormal gas generator rotation speed N1
Uncommanded
acceleration
Overspeed
Uncommanded
deceleration
Incorrect
response time
Fluctuations
Note: If one engine remains at a
fixed speed, while the second
engine operates normally, this
indicates a major failure
("frozen" metering unit)
MISCELLANEOUS CASES
TROUBLESHOOTING
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.9
TROUBLESHOOTING
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Despite the high reliability of the product, failures remain
inevitable and happen at random. However, their rate and
effects can be reduced if the “enemies” of the engine are taken
into consideration.
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
CONCLUSION
When a failure occurs, you have to be in a position to correct it.
"Enemies" of the engine
The traditional adverse conditions for this type of engine are:
- Supply (oil, air, fuel, electricity):
• Oil: not in conformity with spec., contamination
• Air: sand, salt, pollution
• Fuel: not in conformity with spec., contamination
• Electricity: low voltage, connectors, interference
- Operation (failure to comply with instructions and procedures,
severe operating conditions)
- Maintenance (failure to comply with inspection frequencies,
various errors, poor logistics).
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.10
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
FUEL
ELECTRICITY
- Not in conformity with
specifications
- Water in fuel
- Sulphur + salt in the air =
sulphidation
- Low voltage during
starting
- Interference
AIR
OPERATION
- Sand
- Salt
- Pollution
- Failure to comply with
instructions and procedures
- Severe operating conditions
OIL
MAINTENANCE
- Failure to comply with
inspection frequencies
- Various errors
- Poor logistics
- Not in conformity
with specifications
- Contamination
CONCLUSION
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
12.11
TROUBLESHOOTING
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
- Introduction ........................................................................................... 13.2
- Questionnaire 1 ..................................................................................... 13.3
- Questionnaire 2 ..................................................................................... 13.6
- Questionnaire 3 ..................................................................................... 13.12
- Questionnaire 4...................................................................................... 13.15 - 13.28
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.1
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
13 - CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Method
Types of questionnaires
Continuous checking helps to ensure the information is
assimilated. It is more a method of work than a testing in the
traditional sense.
Several types of questionnaire can be used during a course:
- Traditional written questionnaires
- "Short answer" questionnaires
Objectives of the questionnaires
The questionnaires allow progressive assimilation and longterm retention of knowledge. The questionnaires are a subject
for discussion (effects of group dynamics). They also allow
trainees to consider important subjects several times from
different points of view.
- Multiple-Choice Questionnaires (MCQ)
- Oral questionnaires
- Learning Through Teaching (LTT): the trainee has to explain
a given subject.
Integration into the training programme
Examination
- First hour every day for revision of the subjects previously
studied
The final examination at the end of the course consists of three
tests: written, oral and practical. A course certificate is given
to each trainee.
- After each chapter (or module) of the course
- At the end of the training course.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.2
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
INTRODUCTION
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
This traditional questionnaire is established according to the
same plan as the training notes in which the answers can be
found.
Power plant
1
- List the main functional components of the power plant.
2
- Explain the thermodynamic operation of the engine.
3
-
State the following features (at take-off, in standard
atmosphere):
• Power on the shaft
• Output shaft rotation speed
• Mass of the engine with specific equipment.
Engine
1 - List the main components of the gas generator.
2 - State the following characteristics:
• Compression ratio
• Turbine entry temperature
• N2 speed at 100%
• N1 speed at 100%
3
- Describe the power turbine assembly.
4
- Describe the fuel injection system.
5
- List the engine driven accessories.
6
- List the bearings which support the gas generator.
7
- Describe the system used for bearing sealing.
4
-Explain the principle of engine adaptation to helicopter
power requirements.
5
- List the main operating ratings.
8
- Describe the modular construction of the engine.
6
-
How do temperature and altitude affect the engine
performance.
9
- Describe the engine air intake.
7
- List the main aspects of the maintenance concept.
8
- List the technical publications used for engine maintenance.
9
- Name the LRUs of the air system.
10 -
List the manufacturing materials of the engine main
components.
10 -Explain the attachment of each of the modules.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.3
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 1
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
QUESTIONNAIRE 1 (continued)
Oil system
Control system
1 - List the main functions of the control system.
2 - Explain the general operation of the oil system.
2 - Explain the basic principle of the control system.
3 - Describe the oil filter assembly.
3 - Explain the operating principle of the speed control.
4 - State the location of strainers and magnetic plugs.
Air system
4 - Describe the purpose and operation of the anticipator
control.
1 - List the functions ensured by the internal air system
(secondary system).
5 - Explain the operation of the acceleration controller.
2 - List the function of the various air tappings.
3 - Why are the start injectors ventilated?
4 - Explain the purpose and the operation of the compressor
bleed valve.
Fuel system
6 - What are the main sections of the FCU.
7 - Describe and explain the operation of the power turbine
overspeed system.
8 - Describe the principle of load sharing in a twin engine
configuration.
1 - What is the purpose of the Booster pump.
Measurement and indicating systems
2 - Describe the fuel pump.
1 - Describe the power turbine speed indicating system.
3 - Describe the fuel metering unit.
2 - Explain the operating principle of the torquemeter system.
4 - What is the purpose of the constant ∆P valve.
3 - Describe the gas temperature indicating system.
5 - Explain the principle of fuel injection (main and starting
injection).
6 - Explain the operation of the overspeed electro-valve and
the stop valve.
7 - Describe the manual control system.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.4
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
1 - Draw a simplified diagram of the oil system.
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
Starting system
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 1 (continued)
1 - Describe the cranking function of the engine.
2 - Describe the ignition system (ignition unit and igniter plugs).
3 - List the main phases of the starting cycle.
4 - Describe the starting control electrical system.
Electrical system
1 - List the engine electrical accessories.
2 - List the sensors (state the type of signal produced).
3 - Describe the electrical harnesses and connectors.
Engine installation
1 - Describe the attachment of the engine to the aircraft.
2 - Describe the engine power drive and the power transmission.
3 - List the various engine / aircraft interfaces.
4 - Describe the fire protection system of the engine.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.5
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
Questions
QUESTIONNAIRE 2
Trainees can answer orally or in writing in the space provided.
10 - Flight envelope - Max. altitude?
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
The following questions require short, precise answers.
Answers
11 - Flight envelope Max. temperature?
Questions
Answers
12 - Start envelope - Max. altitude?
1 - ARRIEL 1 power class?
13 - Engine air flow at 100% N1?
2 - Power turbine rotation speed at
100%?
14 - Overall compression ratio?
3 - Type of main fuel injection?
4 - Number of engine modules?
5 - Number of power turbine stages?
6 - Meaning of AEO?
15 - Max. turbine entry temperature?
16 - Gas generator rotation speed at
100% N1?
17 - Direction of rotation of the gas
generator?
7 - Mass of the equipped engine?
18 - Direction of rotation of the power
turbine?
8 - Power evolution when altitude
increases?
19 - Manufacturing material for the axial
compressor?
9 - Torque evolution function of N2
rotation speed?
20 - What type of bearing is the axial
compressor bearing?
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.6
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
21 - How is the axial compressor mounted
on the gas generator module?
22 - Axial compressor compression ratio?
23 - Manufacturing material for the
centrifugal compressor wheel?
Answers
Questions
Answers
30 - Type of gas generator rear bearing?
31 - Type of power turbine front bearing?
32 - To which module does the power
turbine nozzle guide vane belong?
33 - Type of power turbine?
24 - Number of stages of the centrifugal
compressor diffuser?
34 - Does the exhaust pipe belong to one
module (yes or no)?
25 - Type of combustion chamber?
35 - Type of exhaust pipe attachment?
26 - Manufacturing material for the
combustion chamber?
36 - Number of gears in the reduction
gearbox?
27 - Type of main fuel injection?
37 - Rotation speed of the intermediate gear
of the reduction gearbox?
28 - Pressure drop in the combustion
chamber?
29 - Number of stages of the gas generator
turbine?
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Questions
38 - Number of driven accessories on the
accessory gearbox?
39 - Manufacturing material for the
accessory gearbox casing?
Edition: May 2014
13.7
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
Answers
Questions
Answers
40 - Is the oil pressure adjustable?
50 - Setting of the low oil pressure switch?
41 - Number of pumps in the oil pump
pack?
51 - Max. oil temperature?
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Questions
52 - Location of the centrifugal breather?
42 - Type of oil pumps?
43 - What is the setting of the check valve
at the pressure pump outlet?
44 - Filtering ability of the oil filter?
45 - Setting of the oil filter by-pass valve?
53 - Air tapping for the pressurisation of
the power turbine front bearing?
54 - Air pressure at the centrifugal
compressor outlet?
55 - Temperature at the centrifugal
compressor outlet?
46 - Which bearings are ball bearings?
56 - When does the start injector ventilation
begin?
47 - Type of seal for the gas generator rear
bearing sealing?
57 - Max. air tapping flow?
48 - Max. oil consumption?
49 - Type of oil pressure transmitter?
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
58 - Type of compressor bleed valve?
59 - Position of the bleed valve during
starting?
Edition: May 2014
13.8
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
Answers
Questions
Answers
60 - What are the bleed valve control
signals?
71 - How is the anticipator signal
transmitted?
61 - Where is the bleed valve fitted?
72 - Setting of the fuel pressurising valve?
62 - Type of fuel filter?
73 - Fuel flow through the start injectors?
63 - Filtering ability of the fuel filter?
64 - Setting of the fuel filter by-pass valve?
65 - Type of fuel pump?
74 - Number of start injectors?
75 - Position of the combustion chamber
drain valve when the engine is
stopped?
66 - Position of the pump pressure relief
valve in normal engine running?
76 - Type of fuel control system?
67 - Type of fuel metering device?
77 - Signals for the acceleration controller
68 - Position of the constant ∆P valve when
the engine is stopped?
78 - Average response time of the control
system
69 - Type of manual fuel flow control?
79 - Is the static droop compensated
70 - Type of valve for injector
ventilation?
80 - Position of the main valve with lever in
emergency plus
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Questions
Edition: May 2014
13.9
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
81 - Meaning of OEI?
82 - Type of N2 controller?
83 - Position of the manual valve with
the lever in the emergency minus
range?
84 - Closing threshold of the reinjection
prohibition switch
85 - What keeps the metering needle
closed when the control lever is
closed?
86 - Position of the manual control lever in
normal engine running?
Answers
Questions
Answers
91 - Where is the oil pressure transmitter
located?
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Questions
92 - H o w a r e t h e t h e r m o c o u p l e s
connected (parallel or series)?
93 - Location of the torquemeter?
94 - Type of torque transmitter?
95 - Type of signal output by the transmitter
sensor?
96 - Is the torque transmitter associated
with a particular module?
97 - Type of starter?
87 - Type of speed sensors?
98 - Type of ignition system?
88 - What is the average torque pressure at
100% torque ?
99 - Gas generator rotation speed at starter
cut-off?
89 - How does the low oil pressure switch
sense the pressure?
90 - Number of thermocouple probes?
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.10
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
Answers
Questions
Answers
100 - Number of igniter plugs?
111 - Max. gas temperature during starting?
101 - Max. duration of a ventilation?
112 - Low oil pressure switch setting?
102 - Is the ignition cable integral with the
igniter plug?
113 - Min. electrical supply voltage before
starting?
103 - Number of electrical connectors?
114 - Meaning of LRU?
104 - Location of the tachometer box?
115 - Meaning of TBO?
105 - Type of seal on the power shaft?
116 - Is borescopic inspection of the
combustion chamber possible?
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Questions
106 - Type of connection engine/MGB?
107 - Number of engine drains?
117 - Is there an adjustment of the
torquemeter?
108 - Engine operating envelope; min. and
max. altitude pressure?
109 - Max. starting altitude?
110 - Power turbine max. overspeed?
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.11
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
This type of questionnaire is used to revise certain important
points in a relatively short time and to assess how much
knowledge has been acquired.
The answers to the questions can be found at the end of the
questionnaire.
1 - The ARRIEL 1 engine is:
a) a free turbine turboshaft engine
b) a turbo-jet engine
c) a fixed turbine turboshaft engine.
2 - Section of passage of the compressor diffusers:
a) regular
b) divergent
c) convergent.
3 - Type of combustion chamber:
a) annular with centrifugal injection
b) annular, reverse flow
c) annular, indirect flow.
4 - The power turbine nozzle guide vane belongs to :
a) module M04
b) module M03
c) module M02
5 - Type of exhaust pipe attachment:
a) bolts
b) mounting pads
c) clamp.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
6 - How many bearings support the gas generator :
a) 4
b) 2
c) 3
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 3
7 - The engine includes:
a) a hot section and a cold section
b) 5 modules
c) 4 modules.
8 - Type of oil system:
a) dry sump
b) constant pressure
c) lubrication by splashing.
9 - Setting of the oil filter pre-blockage indicator :
a) lower than the by-pass valve
b) higher than the by-pass valve
c) the same as the pump valve.
10 - The oil strainers are located:
a) at the outlet of the pumps
b) on the inlet of the scavenge pumps
c) at the inlet of the lubricated components.
11 - Is there a max. oil temperature:
a) yes, 60°C
b) no
c) yes, 115°C max.
Edition: May 2014
13.12
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
12 - The air tapped at the centrifugal wheel outlet pressurises :
a) some labyrinth seals
b) the tank
c) the pumps.
13 - Position of the bleed valve during flight?
a) open
b) closed
c) depends on conditions.
14 - Ventilation of start injectors:
a) does not exist
b) is made with air from the compressor
c) is made with atmospheric air pressure:
15 - The injection centrifugal wheel is drained:
a) permanently
b) to enable the ventilation cycle
c) during engine shut-down.
16 - The max. speed of the gas generator is:
a) limited by a mechanical stop
b) limited by a hydraulic stop
c) not limited by the Fuel Control Unit.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
17 - The gap between the metering needle and the fork:
a) represents the instant flow step
b) varies with N1
c) provides a smoother acceleration.
18 - The fuel pump is:
a) vane type
b) centrifugal
c) gear type.
19 - The fuel system pressurising valve:
a) is electrically controlled
b) operates when overpressure occurs
c) gives priority to the start injectors.
20 - The starter is de-energised (except 1E version):
a) automatically
b) by air pressure
c) manually.
21 - The thermocouples are wired:
a) in series
b) in parallel
c) on the turbine casing.
Edition: May 2014
13.13
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 3 (continued)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
22 - The torque indicating system:
a) is hydraulic
b) is not used
c) is of phase displacement type.
28 - HE ignition means:
a) Hot Electrode
b) High Energy
c) High Emission.
23 - Number of thermocouple probes:
a) 3
b) 4
c) 5.
29 - Borescopic inspection is used to check:
a) the external parts condition
b) the condition of internal parts which are not accessible
without removal
c) the reduction gearbox condition.
24 - Oil pump pressure relief valve setting?
a) 300 kPa
b) 600 kPa
c) 800 kPa.
30 - The reliability of the engine is:
a) good
b) fairly good
c) extremely good.
4-b
9-a
14 - b
19 - c
24 - c
29 - b
5-a
10 - b
15 - c
20 - c
25 - b
30 - abc?
Answers
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
3-a
8-a
13 - c
18 - c
23 - a
28 - b
27 - Starting is possible with one igniter:
a) yes
b) no
c) yes, in emergency.
2-b
7-b
12 - a
17 - a
22 - a
27 - a
26 - The starter is supplied via a:
a) contactor
b) micro switch
c) transistor.
1-a
6-c
11 - c
16 - a
21 - b
26 - a
25 - Bleed valve position is transmitted by:
a) a pressure switch
b) a micro switch
c) an RVDT.
Edition: May 2014
13.14
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 3 (continued)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
This type of questionnaire is a sort of drill which is also used to
test and perfect the knowledge acquired.
2 - Name the reference stations and place the numbers in the
correct circles:
1 - Complete this table (with values):
C
G
T1
T2
Max. Take-Off Power
CC
Compression ratio
Engine air flow
0
1
2
WF
3
4
5
N2 speed at 100%
N1 speed at 100%
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
0 - .....................................
3 - ....................................
1 - .....................................
4 - ....................................
2 - .....................................
5 - ....................................
Edition: May 2014
13.15
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 4
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
1
2
3
6
5
4
1 - .........................................................
2 - .............................................................
3 - .......................................................
4 - .........................................................
5 - .............................................................
6 - ......................................................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.16
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
3 - Engine - Complete the legend of the diagram below:
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
4 - Oil system - Complete the legend of the diagram below:
AIRFRAME
4
ENGINE
2
1
5
3
6
1 - .........................................................
2 - .............................................................
3 - .......................................................
4 - .........................................................
5 - .............................................................
6 - ......................................................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.17
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
P0
P1'
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
5 - Air system - Tick the boxes as required to indicate which air pressure is used for each function:
P2
Injector ventilation
Acceleration control unit
Bleed valve control pressure
Injection wheel pressurisation
Axial compressor bearing pressurisation
Gas generator rear bearing cooling
Power turbine bearing chamber labyrinth pressurisation
Gas generator turbine disc cooling
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.18
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
6 - Air system - Complete the legend of the compressor field diagram:
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
P2/P0 PRESSURE
RATIO
A
B
C
AIRFLOW
G
A - .........................................................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
B - .............................................................
Edition: May 2014
C - .......................................................
13.19
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
1
2
3
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
7 - Fuel system - Complete the legend of the diagram below:
4
5
6
8
7
1 - .....................................
2 - .....................................
3 - .....................................
4 - ..............................
5 - .....................................
6 - .....................................
7 - .....................................
8 - ..............................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.20
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
8 - Fuel system - Complete the legend of the diagram below:
8
7
1
2
6
3
5
4
1 - .....................................
2 - .....................................
3 - .....................................
4 - ..............................
5 - .....................................
6 - .....................................
7 - .....................................
8 - ..............................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.21
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
Engine stopped
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
9 - Fuel system - Indicate the position of the following components according to the operating conditions:
Engine in stabilised
flight
Fuel pump..................................................................
Pump pressure relief valve.........................................
Constant ∆P valve .....................................................
Metering needle .........................................................
Start electro-valve......................................................
Stop purge valve........................................................
Pressurising valve......................................................
Main valve..................................................................
Combustion chamber drain valve...............................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.22
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
10 - Control system - List the components:
1
2
6
P2
3
WF
5
+
N1
4
N1*
+
N2
+
N2*
1 - .........................................................
2 - .............................................................
3 - .......................................................
4 - .........................................................
5 - .............................................................
6 - ......................................................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.23
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
Power turbine
speed N2
time
Load
TRQ
Fuel flow
WF
time
time
Gas generator
speed N1
time
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.24
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
11 - Complete the following graphs during a load TRQ increase:
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
4
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
12 - Drains/Purges/Air vents - Complete the legend of the diagram below:
3
5
6
7
8
1
2
1 - .....................................
2 - .....................................
3 - .....................................
4 - ..............................
5 - .....................................
6 - .....................................
7 - .....................................
8 - ..............................
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.25
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
13 - Complete the following table :
Number of lifting points?
Type of fire detectors?
Number of drain points?
Air used for intake anti-icing?
Max. air tapping flow for aircraft use?
Loss of power due to aircraft tapping?
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.26
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
14 - Give a brief definition of the following documents:
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
Maintenance manual(s)
Spare parts catalogue
Tools catalogue
Service bulletins
Service letters
Engine log book
Flight manual
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.27
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
ARRIEL 1
Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
15 - Troubleshooting - Indicate the probable cause(s) of the following failures.
1 - On start selection, N increases but not
the gas temperature.
2 - On start selection, N and T4 increase
but not sufficiently to obtain start.
3 - Surge of the compressor.
4 - Max. power not obtained.
5 - On stop selection, the engine does not
completely shut-down.
6 - Incorrect speed of the helicopter rotor.
7 - Power turbine overspeed.
8 - Drop of oil pressure.
9 - Abnormal T4 temperature.
10 - N1 overspeed.
For training purposes only
© Copyright - Turbomeca Training
Edition: May 2014
13.28
CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE
of these Training Notes and (maybe also) of the course
but not the END of your training
which must be continued,
harmonising knowledge and experience.
THANK YOU for your kind attention.
Au revoir
Goodbye
Adiós
Auf Wiedersehen
Adeus
Arrivederci
Farvel
To t z i e n s
Adjö
Näkemiin
Antio
Ma salaam
Selamat jalan
Adishatz
Ikus Arte
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
END
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Any remarks (appreciations, criticisms, suggestions...) should be forwarded to:
TURBOMECA
CENTRE D’INSTRUCTION
40220 TARNOS - FRANCE
REMARKS CONCERNING THE TRAINING AIDS
REMARKS CONCERNING THE TRAINING COURSE
Name.......................................................................................................................... .
Address..................................................................................................................... .
Course........................................................ from.........................to.......................... .
TURBOMECA Training Centre
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
REMARKS
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)
Download